s

CD

CO

HANDBOOK OF PALI

PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS

NORQATE.

Price 18.

Clotli, gilt.

Buddha; His

Sf

His Doctrine, His Order.

Life,

By

Hehjtaxn Oldexbeho, Professor at the University of

Berlin, Editor of the Yinaya Pitakam and the Dipavamsa in
Translated from the German by "William Hoey, M.A.,
Pali.
Dr.

D.Lrr.,

Member

of the

Royal Asiatic Society, Asiatic Society

Her Majesty's

of Bengal, etc., of

Price 21.

8vo. cloth.

A Manual

of

Buddhism

Civil Service.

in its

Modem

Development

from Singhalese MSS.

By R. Spence Hardy,
M.R.A.S., Author of "Eastern Monachism." Second Edition,
with a complete Index by Dr. 0. Ekankfubtee.

translated

By

the same Author.

Eastern Monachism

8vo. cloth.

Price 12.

an Account of the Origin, Laws,

Discipline, Sacred "Writings, Mysterious Rites, Religious Ceremonies, and Present Circumstances of the Order of Mendicants

founded by Gotama Buddha (compiled from Singhalese MSS.

and other Original Sources of Information). "With Comparative Notices of the Usages and Institutions of the "Western
Ascetics, and a Review of the Monastic System.

Price 10.

8vo. cloth.

Ehys Davids' Buddhism

Growth

of Religion,

History of Indian

as

6rf.

Lectures on the Origin and

illustrated

Buddhism.

By

by some points in the

Rhys Davids, Esq.

T. \V.

Being the Hibbert Lectures 1881.

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

14,

Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London;

and 20, South Frederick

Street,

Edinburgh.

PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS ^ NORQATE.

BOOKS IN PALI.
BUDDHIST SCRIPrrRES IN PALI.
In 5

Price 21

vols. 8vo.

each vol.

The Vinaya Pitakam, one

of the principal Buddhist

Holy Scriptures in the Pali Language. Edited by Dr. H.
Oldenbeeg. Vol. I. The Mahavagga, with an Introduction.
Vol. III. The Suttavibhanga, I.
Vol. II. The Cullavagga.
Vol. IV. The
Nissaggiya).
Samghadisesa,
Anyata,
(Parajika,

End of Mahavibhanga, BhikkhunlviSuttavibhanga, II.

bhanga. Vol. V. The Parivara. Published with the assistance of the Royal Academy of Berlin, and of the Secretary of
India in Council.
8vo. cloth.

Price 21.

The Dipavamsa, an Ancient Buddhist

Historical Ee-

cord in the Pali Language.

Edited, with an English Translation, by Dr. H. Oldenberg.

The Dipavamsa

is

the most ancient historical

an account of the

tains

work

ecclesiastical history of the

of the Ceylonese

it conBuddhist Church, of the

;

conversion of the Ceylonese to the Buddhist faith, and of the ancient history
of Ceylon.

8vo.

The Milinda

Pafiho.

Price

21.

Being Dialogues between King

Milinda and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena.

edited by V. Tbencknee, of Copenhagen.
*'

The Pali Text

very interesting dialogue between Milinda and Nagasena."

Max

Miilier

in Chips I.

" Next in order of interest should

undoubtedly be named the Milinda Fafiha
Menander.' "Whatever be the origin of this remarkable work,
there can be no doubt of its great antiauity, for it exhibits a familiarity with
Greek names and places, and records a religious discussion between the Buddhist
divine Nagasena and a
Yona ' king Milinda, who can be identified with cerChildera in FuH Dictionary.
tainty with the Bactrian king Menander."
*

or. Questions of

Also Bvo.

Pali Miscellany,

Price

4.

by V. Trenckner. Part

ductory Part of

tiie

I.

The

Intro-

Milinda Panho, an English Translation

and Notes.

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

and

20,

14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London

South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.

HANDBOOK OF

PALI.

3^

.^

HANDBOOK OF

PALI.

AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR,
A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A GLOSSARY.

COMl'ILEU BY

0.

FRANKFURTER,

Ph.D.

WILLIAMS AND NORGATE,

14,

HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON;

AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.
1883.

HERTFORD:
rUMTED BT 8TKPBBN

AVSTI.t

AMD

BOMS.

TO THE EEVEEEND

RICHARD MORRIS,

LL.D., M.A.,

TICE-PBESIDEKT OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIEir,

AS A TOKEir

OF FBIEKDSHIP AND KESPECT.

ERRATA
Page

ERRATA.

XXIV
Page.

line.

BUD.

Page.

line.

BKAU.

146

7,8?

sammata.

dakklUnti.

147

14

sammata.

16

avippavasaih.

anumodama.

124

paligiintliito.

125

125

18?

Kasibharadvajo.

144

132

12

sampajano.

148

24

upajjhayena.

149

27

150

143

20

144

11, etc. ussaho.

144

35

yacati.

dharayamlti.

haritattaya.

1544 18

anu'kathayati.

170* 29

bhikkhunl.

1544 30

anu-parayati.

1735 34

valittaro.

159a 12

ussaho.

176a 25 add. sata-padt

165a

167a

9 add. panudanam ' removal.'

Pag'e 60.
e.g.

satta-nikdyo.

The

first

a centi-

pede.*

person plural of the optative ends sometimes in

viharemu, j'dnemu.

verses.

'

(f)

This

is

'

an archaic form, occurring mostly

a,'

io

CONTENTS.
FAOB
Preface

ix

Pali Bibliography

XT

Pakt

Alphabet

Pronunciation

Classification of Letters

Vowels
Short Vowels
Long Vowels
Nasal Vowels

5
7

Interchange of Vowels
Consonants .

7
7

Phonetic Changes .
Compound Consonants

II

Sandhi

21

24
25
29
41
42
47
47
49

61

Euphonic Changes
Declension

Declension of Nouns

Comparison

Declension of Pronouns

Numerals
Cardinals

Ordinals

The Verb

Present System .
Modes of the Present Tense
Perfect System .
Aorist and Imperfect

Future
Conditional
Participles, Infinitives

Gerunds

Compounds

58
60
61
66

67
69
70
70
73
74

Indeclinables

Adverbs
Prepositions

53

PAOB
SamaneraPanham (Khuddaka Nikaya) 82
Dvatimsakuram
,,
,,
Paccavekkhana (Anguttara Nikaya)
Dasadhammasuttam ,,
,,

Mahamangalasuttam

(Khuddaka

Nikaya)
Ratanasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya)
Karanlyamettasuttam
.

II.

Saranagamanam (Khuddaka Nikaya)

.84

85
88
Khandhaparittam(AnguttaraNikaya) 89
90
Mettasuttam
,,
Mettanisamsam (Jataka)
.
.91
,,
Moraparittam
Candaparittam (Samyutta Nikaya)
.

Suriyaparittam

.92
.

.
Dhajaggaparittam
Mahakassappattherabojjhangam
.
(Samyutta Nikaya)
Girimanandasuttam
(Samyutta
Nikaya)
Atilnatiyasuttam (Digha Nikaya)
Dhammacakkappavattanasuttam
.
(Samyutta Nikaya)
Mahusamayasuttam (Dlgha Nikaya)
Alavakasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya)
Parabhavasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya)
Vasalasuttam
.

KasibharadvajasuttaTn

,,

92

.93

,,

,,

94
96

97
101
109
112
118
120
122
126

,,

Saccavibhangam (Majjhima Nikaya) 127

Arunavatisuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) 133
136
Devadahasuttam
,,
142
A Collection of Kammavacas
.

Part
Glossary
Tables of Alphabets

III.

162
:

Sinhalese Alphabet.

Part

82
82
83

Burmese Alphabet.
Kambodian Alphabet.
Comparative Table of Alphabets.
b

PREFACE.
The Handbook

of Piili which I place before

my

readers

an Elementary Grammar, a Chresto-

consists of three parts,

mathy, and a Glossary.

grammar an elementary one, because no

attempt has been made to distinguish the different periods
in the development of the language.
To write a scientific
I have called the

grammar

of Pali,

it

would be necessary not only

to

have

recourse to the different so-called ancient Prakritic dialects,

but also to the modern Aryan languages of India, more

especially Mahrathl.

I believe MahrathI to be, if not the

daughter of Pali, at least more closely allied to it than

any other of the Indian vernacular tongues and among
;

these I include also Sinhalese.

grammar

can, in

my

In

fact,

a scientific Pali

opinion, only be written as part of a

comparative grammar of the Aryan languages of India.

I have called this work a Handbook of Pali. This requires

some explanation.

hammer,

am

well aware that Professor Forch-

in his report of the

1880, has shewn

Rangoon High

conclusively,

as

School, 1879-

did the late Professor

Childers before him, that Pali means only Sacred Texts.

Professor Forchhammer, quoting from Burmese books, says
" The
Tipitaka Pali was written by means of the Magadha"
bhasha ;
and again, " The Pali of the Tipitaka may be
:

He goes on to
by means of any language."
remark that "a Pali grammar and a Pali dictionary must

preached

PREFACE.

appear to the Burmans as an incomprehensible misnomer,

or at best what to us would be a Bible dictionary or a
of the

grammar

New

Testament."

I believe the examples

In a grammar of the New Testafind the New Testament Greek.

are not very well chosen.

ment we expect

to

mean a

Bible dictionary would

cyclopaedia,

in

which one

can find information on any Bible subject.

I could have chosen

"Handbook

of Miigadhl" as a

of the book; but this would imply more than

Under such a

given in the book.

to find a

grammar

actually

one would expect

of the Miigadhese Inscriptions and of

the MagadhI of the drama.

Handbook

title

is

title

Moreover, in calling

it

of MagadhI, I should have committed myself to

a definite statement about the country in which the language

Pali means for

of the Buddhist Scriptures was spoken.

European scholars the sacred language of the Buddhist

Scriptures, and as a matter of convenience this designation
ought to be kept until conclusive proofs are adduced
to shew in which part of India this Prakrit dialect was

"We have moreover the excellent authority of

spoken.

Subhuti,

and

his

As
is

who

calls his

Ndmamdld

Abhidhdnappadlpikd a Pali dictionary,

a work on Pali grammar.

a reading-book I have chosen the Paritta.

based on a

MS.

in the British

in Sinhalese characters.

Burmese

copies,

Museum

The

text

(Or. 1092), written

Besides this I had several printed

and one printed Sinhalese copy of the book.

They however vary in

the

selection

they give.

contains all the extracts given in the reading-book.

None
Part

well known, been published by the

and
late Professor Childers,
by the late M. Grimblot, with
Some of the
notes and translations by M. L^on Feer.

of the Paritta has, as

suttas

which

in

is

"
are given as
the " Extraits du Paritta

PREFACE.

xi

belonging to the Sutta Nipata occur also in the Samyutta

The two

Nikaya.
lished

by the late

suttas of the

M. Grimblot

I have consulted the

MSS.

constituting the text.

The

Digha Nikiiya wore pubin the " Sept Suttas Palis."

of the individual Nikayas in

translation of the Sutta Nipata

FausboU

in the "Sacred Books of the

given by
"
East was of great service to me in deciding on the merits

Professor

of the various readings.

I have not seen the " Ceylon

Friend," in which the late Rev. D. Gogerly has translated

most

if

not

all

the suttas belonging to the Paritta.

I shall

take an early opportunity of giving a more elaborate account

of the compilation of the book and the different versions

which we have of

The

it.

other extracts given are

"A

Collection of

Kamma-

If the Paritta was intended to represent the style

vacas."

of the Sutta Pitaka, these

may be taken

as a fairly

good

specimen of the Yinaya Pitaka. I also reserve for a later

occasion any mention of the relation of the Kammavacas
to the

Vinaya Pitaka,

tion to the

stands

to

mavacas

viz. if

they stand in the same rela-

Mahavagga and Cullavagga

The
the Sutta Yibhanga.
based on

is

Library (Pali 1 and

as the

MSS. belonging
2).

They

Patimokkha
the

text of
to

the

Kam-

Bodleian

are written in the square

and represent the usual Burmese orthography.

between linguals and dentals is seldom made,
For several
nor do they write anusvdm after * and u.
character,

A distinction
chapters

have consulted

other

MSS.

in

the

British

Museum, and some belonging to the Liverpool Free Library.

They present the same texts, and are also written in the
Whilst examining the Liverpool
Professor
with
Rhys Davids, to whom
company
they had been sent by Sir James Allanson Picton for
square painted character.

MSS., in

PREFACE.

xii

and

identification

we found

report,

24091) was of especial value, as

Kammavueas not appearing

in

given

that one of
it

contained a few extra

in the usual text

in

it

(see Bibliography).

third part contains the Glossary.

I have omitted

In employing two sorts of type

to distinguish between compound

proper names.

all

which I have

Professor Spiegel and Mr.

the Chrestomathy.

Dickson have published part of the text

The

them (No.

and hyphens I have tried

words and simple ones. Compound words ought all to have
been given under their last member, as is done in Benfey's
This

Sanskrit Dictionary.

member

last

in the

is

the only scientific way.

Indo-European languages

is

The

explained

by the preceding ones, or as the late Professor Benfey put it

in his lectures, " the defining members always precede
the

defined."

But

as

all

the second

members did not

occur in the glossary, I had to give up this plan, and to limit

myself to using
capitals,

I employ
compound words.
compound words when the individual

italics

however, for

for

meaning of the component parts is another than that of the

whole word e. g. addhayogo was printed in capitals for that
;

reason.

I have not attempted to explain the difierent philo-

sophical terms which occur in the extracts.

one translation, and put a

Fault

may

Nihhdnam

among

so

perhaps

as the

many

be

1. 1.

(technical term) after them.

found with

summum bonum

different views

I give mostly

it

the

explanation

of the Buddhists;

seems to

me

of

but

best neither

an opinion nor to defend one.

I have given the third person singular present of the
verb, and translated this throughout with the infinitive.
to offer

The
in

third person singular present, as is well

known, has

Indian grammar the same value as the infinitive

modern grammar.

It is the type given for the verb

of

by the

PREFACE.

To give the

native grammarians.

commend

itself

principle of

to

xiii

me

two

for

so-called root did not

reasons.

First,

and not

the root- theory has been recently,

without reason, greatly shaken, so that

it

to introduce

to

it.

Secondly,

the root of a Pali word.

it is difficult

the

would not be wise

determine what

is

I have given the nominative case

of nouns, and here I think

may

deserve some blame.

shewn in the chapter on declension, through the

working of the phonetic laws none of the declensions keeps
within its own range, and the crude form of a Pali noun is
But, as

is

thus not easily fixed.

I have availed myself on every occasion of

all

the books

published on Pali grammar, and consulted Childers's Dictionary of the Pali Language. These works will be found
in the appended Bibliography.
larly the works of Professors

name here more

Kuhn and

Senart, of the Terunnanse Subhuti,

Minayefi",

particu-

of

M.

and of Dr. Trenckner.

I hope the Tables of Alphabets will be found useful.

In conclusion, I have to thank Dr. Morris for many
valuable suggestions, and for his kindness in looking over

the proof-sheets.

am

also indebted to the authorities of

Museum, and the India

the courtesy and ready help I have

the Bodleian Library, the British

Office

Library,

for

uniformly received from them.

0.
OxroKD, February, 1883.

FRANKFURTER.

PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

I.

PALI LITERATURE.

Examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals.

TuRNOUR, G.

J.A.S. of Bengal, 1837, 1838.

Westergaard, N. L.

Codices

Indici

Havniensis enumerati et descripti.

Hardy, Rev. R.
lese

bibliothecae

regioe

Copenhagen, 1846.

Books in the Pali and SinghaJ.R.A.S. Ceylon Branch, 1848.

List of

S.

Languages.

J. DE.
Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit, Pali, and
Sinhalese Literary "Works of Ceylon.
Colombo, 1870.

Alwis,

Catalogue of Pali, Sinhalese, and Sanskrit

Manuscripts in the Ceylon Government Oriental Library.

Zoysa, L. de.

Colombo, 1876.

Forchhammer,
Report

E., Professor of Pali,

by, for the year

W.

Davids, T.

Rhys.

Rangoon High

School.

1879-1880.

Report

on

Pali

and Sinhalese.

Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1876.

Les nouveaux Manuscripts Palis de la biblioAnnales de I'extreme Orient, 1880.

Feer, L.

theque nationale.

Morris, Rev. Dr. Richard.

Report on Piili Literature,
Transactions of the Philological Society,
1875-1880.
1881.

Haas, E.
British

Trubner

Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the

London, 1876.

Museum.

&

Co.

Catalogue of leading Books on Pali,

London, 1881.

Prakrit, and Buddhist Literature.

TALI BIBLIOORAPnY.

xvi

II.

One

ViNAYA PiTAKAM.
Scriptures.

TEXTS.

of the principal Buddhist

by Hermann

Edited

Holy

Oldenbcrg.

vols.

London, 1879-1883.

Kammavaca.
Spiegel,

F.

de

officiis

et lutine edidit.

Bonn,

Kammavjikyam,

buddhicorum

piilice

liber

1841.

Anecdota Palica.

Chaps, ii, iii. v.

1845.
Leipzig,
Boehtlingk, 0. Bulletin de I'Academie Imp^riale
des Sciences, 1844, No. 22, chap. iv.
Dickson, J. F. Upasampada Kammavaca. J.R.A.S.
1875.

The Pall Manuscript written on

Papyrus, preserved

Armenian
1875.

in

Monastery,

(This appears to

the
St.

Library of the
Lazaro.

Venice,

be a reprint of the

preceding.)

Patimokkha.
Minayeff, J.

Pratiraoksha Sutra buddijskij sluzeb-

niku izdannyj
1869.

perevedennyj.

Petersburg,

Dickson, J. F. Piltlraokkha, being the Buddhist

Office of the Confession of Priests.
J.R.A.S.

1876.

SUTTA PiTAKAM.

DTOHA NiKAYA.
Qrimblot, P.

Nikaya.

Sept Suttas Palis, tir^s du Digha

Paris, 1876.

Childers, R. C.

Mahaparinibbanasutta.

1878.
Mahasatipatthanasutta.

Maulmain, 1881.

London,

PALI BIBLIOGRAPEY.

xvii

SUTTA PlTAKAM.

SaMYUTTA NlKAYA.
Feer, H. L. Le Bhikkhuni Samyuttam, M^raoires
de

Societe

la

d'Ethnographie, Sect.

Orient,

1877.

Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble

Frankfurter, 0.
Eightfold Path. J.R.A.S. 1880.

MaJJHIMA NlKAYA.
Pischel, R.

Edited and trans-

A8sala3'anasuttam.
Chemnitz, 1880.

lated.

Anguitara Nikaya.
Publications of the Pali Text

Morris, Rev. Dr. R.

Society.

Khuddaka Nikaya.
FausboU, y.

The Jataka, together with

Vols.

mentary.
1879.

Two

i.

and

Jatakas

Com-

the original Pali text,

London.
Five Jatakas.

etc.

its

London, 1877,

ii.

Copenhagen, 1861.

Ten Jatakas, Copenhagen, 1872.

The Dasaratha Jataka. Copenhagen,
1874.

Die sechszehnte Erzahlung des

Th.

Zachariae,

Contains

Vetalapaucaviri9ati.
dantl-jataka.

B.B.

iv. p.

"Weber, A., and Fausboll, V.

Entstehung des Sakya

Indische

schlechtes.

the

Umma-

375.

Die Sage von der

Koliya Ge-

und

Streifen

i.

Berlin,

1868.
Fausboll, V.

Dhammapadam, ex

Havniensibus

Palice

tribus codicibus

edidit.

Copenhagen,

1855.
Childers,

R. C.

Khuddaka

translation, etc.

Spiegel,

F.

Piitha,

with English

J.R.A.S. 1870.

Anecdota

Palica.

Leipzig,

1845.

Contains the Uragasutta of the Sutta Nipata.

TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

xviii

SUTTA PlTAKAM.

Khuddaka Nikaya.
Colombo, 1871.
Alwis, J. de. Buddhist Nirvana.
Contains extracts from the Sutta Nipata.
Morris, Rev. R.

Cany a

Pitaka.

Buddhavamsa.
the

Piili

Textes tir^s du Kandjour.

Paris, 1864-1871.

Feer,

(Publications of

Text Society.)

H. L.

11 livraisons.

J.
Ajjhatta Jaya Mangalam. Rangoon, 1881.
Grimblot, P. Extraits du Paritta, texte et commentaire,
avec introduction, traduction, notes et notices par L^on

Gray,

J.A. 1871.

Feer.

Feer, H. L.
Pirit Pota

Buddhiques. J.A. 1870, etc.

Colombo, 2411 (1869).
Paritta).

Fft\ides

{i.e.

Rangoon, 1879.
Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1881.
Mangalasutta. 2nd ed. Rangoon, 1881.
Mahaparitto.

In Pali and English, with an Introductory

Vol. i.
on
Pali Buddhistical Literature.
By
Essay
Q. Tumour. Colombo, 1837.
From the 37th Chapter. Translated and edited
H.
Sumangala and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantuby
dawa. 2 vols. Colombo, 1877.
DiPAVAMSA. A Buddhist Historical Record. Edited, with
an English translation, by H. Oldenberg. London, 1879.
The Dathavamsa, the Pali text and its
Dhammakitti.

Mahavamso.

translation into English.

By Mutu Coomdra Swamy.

London, 1874.

Hatthavanagallavamsa.
lated from the Pali

by

The Attanagalluvansa.
J. d* Alwis,

Trans-

with the Pali text.

Colombo, 1866.

MiLiNDAPANHO. Being Dialogues between King Milinda

Edited by V.
and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena.
Trenckner. London, 1880.

PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

III.

xlx

TRANSLATIONS.

Clough, Rev. B. The Ritual of the Buddhist Priesthood.

Translated from the original Pali work entitled Karmavakya (Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental "Writers,
vol.

ii.

Beal, Rev.

London, 1834).
and Gogerly, Rev. D.

S.,

Arrangement

of

Two

J.

Translations of

Comparative
Buddhist

the"

London, 1862.

Ritual for the Priesthood.

W.

Rhys, and Oldenberg, H. Vinaya Texts.

Part I. The Piitimokkha
the Mahiivagga.
Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the

Davids, T.

Translated from the Pali.

East, vol.

xiii.)

W. Rhys. Buddhist Suttas. Oxford, 1881.

(Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi. Contains the Mahaparinibbtina Sutta, the Tevijja Sutta, the Mahasudassana

Davids, T.

Sutta, the

Dhammacakkappavattana

Sutta, the Sabba-

sava Sutta.)

Buddhist Birth
Tales.

Weber, A.

Stories, or

Jataka

London, 1880.

Dhammapadam

(Indische Streifen).

MtJLLER, F. Max.

Buddha's Dhammapada.
Translated
from Pali. (Buddhaghosha's Parables. Translated from
Burmese by H. T. Rogers. London, 1870.)

Dhammapada
translated

from

Pali.

the East, vol. x. part

Hu, Ferd.

a Collection of Verses,
(Sacred Books of

1.)

Dhammapadam

duction et notes.

Oxford, 1881.

traduit en Fran9ais, avec intro-

Paris, 1878.

SwAMY, Sir M. Coomara. Sutta Nipata, or the Dialogues

Translated from the Pali, with
of Gotama Buddha.
Introduction and Notes.

London, 1874.

Faxjsboll, V. The Sutta Nipata

translated from Pali.

the East, vol. x. part

a Collection of Discourses,
Oxford, 1881.
(Sacred Books of

2.)

PALI BIBLIOGRAPnT.

XX

DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS,
GRAMMATICAL PAPERS.

IV.

MoGOALLANA Thero.

AND

Abhidlulnappadlpiku, with English

and Sinhalese Interpretations,

By Waskaduwe

etc.

Colombo, 1865.

Subhuti.

Dictionary of the Pali Language.

London, 1875.
Clough, B. a Compendious Pali Grammar, with a Copious
Vocabulary in the same Language. Colombo, 1824.

Childers, R. C.

BuKNouF,

E.,

and Lassen, Chr.

Essai sur le Pali.

Paris,

1826.

Observations grammaticales sur quelques

de
I'essai sur le Pali.
Paris, 1827.
passages
nominum
in lingua Piilica.
declinatione
"W.
De
Storck,
Berlin, 1858.

Casuum

in lingua Palica formatio.

Miinster,

1862.

Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Pali Sprache.

Vienna, 1867-1869.
MiNAYEFF, J. Gram'maire Palie, traduite par St. Guyard.
Paris, 1874.

MiJLLER, F.
Vols.

KuHN,

E.

ii. iii.

i.

W. A.

Beitrage zur Pali Grammatik. Berlin, 1875.

Die Flexion des Pali in ihrem Verhaltnis zum

ToRP, A,

Christiania, 1881.

Sanskrit.

Trenckner, V.
GoLDSCHMiDT,

Pali Miscellany.
Prukritica.

S.

BIlavataro.

Vol.

i.

London, 1879.

Strassburg, 1879.

Pandita Devarakkhitacariyena Samsodhito.

Colombo, 1869* [2412 a.b.].

Kaccayana.
Alwis,

J. de.

Introduction to Kaccayana's
Colombo, 1863.

Grammar

A.

specimen.

of the Pali Language.

KuHN,

E.

W.

Kaccayanappakaranae

Halle, 1869.

specimen
alterum.

Halle, 1871.

TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.

xxi

Kaccayana.

The Piili Text of Kachcliayano's Graraniar,

with English Annotations. Toongoo, 1871.
Senart, E. Kaccayana et la litterature grammaticale
du Pali, l"* Partie. Paris, 1871.
Mason, F.

Kaccayana's Dhatumanjusa. Edited, with

a translation in Sinhalese and English, by Deva-

SIlavamsa.

rakkhita.

Waskaduwe

Colombo, 1872.
Naraamala, or a "Work on Pali

Subhuti.

Grammar.

Ceylon, 1876.
Sumangala.
Declension and Conjugation of Pali "Words.
Edited by M. Gunaratana. Ceylon, 1873.
Sangharakkhita Thera. Subodhalahkara. (Pali Studies,

by Major G. E. Fryer.)

Calcutta, 1875.

"Vuttodaya.
lation

and

Edited, with transCalcutta, 1877.

notes, by Major G. E. Fryer.

Yuttodaya, die Pali Metrik des

herausgegeben

von

J.

Minayeff.

Melanges

Asia-

tiques, vi.

Childers, R. C.

On

Sandhi in Pali.

J.R.A.S.

n.s.

iv.

p. 309.

Dakkh

in Pali.
K.B. viii. p. 150.
The Prakrit Dekkh. K.B. vii. p. 450.
Die wurzeln ^pekkh, dakkh und dekkh
PiscHEL, R.
K.B. vii. p. 453.
Prakrit.
"Weber, A. Zur Yerstiindigung. K.B. vii. p. 458.

PiscHEL, R.
Jacobi,

H.

in

Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiii. p. 423.

Vocaleinschub in Pali. K.Z. xxiii. p. 594.

ZiMMER, H. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiv. p. 220.

Oldenberq, H.
Bemerkungen zur Paligrammatik.

K.Z.

XXV. p. 314.

GoLDscHMiDT,

S.

Priikritische

Miscellen.

K.Z.

xxv.

Z.D.M.G. xxxii. p. 99.

pp. 436, 610.
PiscHEL, R. Pali acchati. B.B. iii. p. 155.
Die
p. 255.

de9lcabdas

bei

Trivikrama.

B.B.

iiL

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.

abl.=: ablative.

p. p. p.

= accusative.
=
adj.
adjective.
adv. = adverb.
ace.

= participle of the per-

fect passive.

par.=para8mai.

aor.=aori8t.

= particle.
=
passive.
pass.

attn.=atmane.

pers.= person.

caus.

part.

= causative.

pe=peyyalo,

comp., cp.=eompare.
cond. =conditional.
conj.

= con junction.

dat.= dative.

= fem.
foil. =
following.
fr. = from.
fut. = future.
gen. = genitive.
ger. = gerund.
Imperat. = Imperative.
inf. = infinitive.
instr. = instrumental.
f.

t.t.= technical term.

voc.= vocative.
J. A.

Royal
B. B.

f.

p. p.

the

Asiatic Society.

= Bezzenberger,

bei-

trage sur kunde der indo-

germanischen sprachen.

K.B. = Kuhn's Beitrage.

m.

future passive,

= Journal Asiatique.
= Journal of

J. II. A. S.

loc.=locative.

= masculine.
n. = neuter.
num. = numeral.
= optative.
opt.
p. = participle
p.

etc.

= plural.
pi.
= preposition.
prep.
=
present.
pres.
= preterite.
pret.
= separately.
sep.
sing. = singular.

K.Z =Kuhn*8

zeitschrift fiir

vergleichende
of

= participle present.

the

schung.
Z. D. M. G.

sprachfor-

= Zeitschrift

deutschen

d.

morgenlan-

dischen gesellschaft.

HANDBOOK OF
PART

PALI.

I.

AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR.
1.

THE ALPHABET.

Pali, the sacred language of the Buddhists, is written,

according to the countries from which the MSS. come, either
(Ceylon), Burmese (Burma), or Karabodian
characters.
The system of writing in the original
(Siam)
characters is syllabic and consonantal (as will be seen from

in

Sinhalese

the appended table).

To transliterate these characters the following system

now mostly adopted

Vowels

is

u u

urn

j
d
d

2.

The vowels

{I)

gh
jh
dh

n
n
(/h)

dh

hh

PRONUNCIATION.
The

are pronounced in the Continental way.

short a has mostly the indistinct sound as in English hut.

The uasal vowels are now pronounced in Ceylon and Burma
1

PALI GRAMMAR.

e and o are
in English hang.
before two
short
but
pronounced
metrically always long,

like

guttural nasal

the

consonants.

The consonants

are pronounced in the

manner known from

Sanskrit grammar.

English ch.
is the Spanish

c is

ti

and French ng

in campagne.

pronounced as English or French v, except when

preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case
V

is

has the sound of English w.

The aspirated letters, surd and sonant, are pronounced as
the corresponding non-aspirates followed by /*.
The sound of the nasal is defined by the letter which
it

follows

it, cf.

3.

English hang, hand, bench, hemp.

CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.

All the vowels and consonants are arranged by the native

grammarians under the following classes

1) a k kh g gh h and h are considered gutturals (kanthaja).
2) t c chjjh n and y are termed palatals {tdluja).
3) u p ph h bh m are termed labials {oHhaja).
4) t th d (/) dh (Ih) n r are termed linguals {muddhaja)}
5) t th d dh n I are termed dentals {dantaja).
6) e is termed gutturo-palatal [kaiithatdluja).
is termed gutturo-labial {kantkoUhaja).
7)
is termed dento-labial (dantolthqja)
V
8)
:

.t

% 4.

1) Pali

VOWELS.

being one of the Indian

dialects, is best con-

sidered in comparison with one of those dialects of which the

grammar is already firmly established, viz. Sanskrit.
In the Sacred Books of the East, edited by Prof. Max Miiller, the palatals
are printed, like gutturals, in italics, and the cerebrals likewise as dentals in
k kh g gh n, t th d dh n.
italics, thus
that the palatals arise always from the
This transliteration seems to
:

imply

the linguals stand to

gutturals, and that they stand in the same relation to these as
This is, howerer, not the case in Pali.
the dentals.
in this handbook is used in most of the texts published up to
The

system adopted
the present time, such as Dr. Oldenbcrg's edition of the Vinayapi^aka, Prof.
Fausbiill's Jataka, and also in Childers's Dictionary of the Pali Language.

SHORT VOWELS.

2) In comparing Piili with Sanskrit forma, it must always

be kept in mind that Sanskrit is not to be regarded as the
parent language but as the dialect which best represents
:

the primitive Aryan speech, to which Sanskrit and Pali stand

in the relation of elder and younger sisters.

In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, we

no written characters for the r and / vowels.
It has not the diphthongs ai au, and lacks the long nasal
find that Pali has

vowels.

We find therefore in

Pali three short vowels a

u,

and

five

long vowels a I u e o, and three nasal vowels am hn urn, which

are also considered long, and which are technically called
niggahlta.

As to the accent, which plays such a conspicuous part in

Vedic Sanskrit, no accented texts have been handed down.
It

however, clear that

is,

Pali

possessed

free

accent

just as much as Sanskrit, and every other Aryan language.

It is now the fashion in Ceylon and Burma to give the accent

long syllable in every word.

to the

is

syllable
of the long,

considered long,

or nasal

if it

vowels, or a

contains one
short vowel

followed by two consonants.

Pali word

only end in a vowel or nasal vowel.

For exceptions see the chapter on Sandhi.

may

5.

SHORT VOWELS.

In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, it will

be seen that the short vowels a i u correspond as a rule to
those of Sanskrit.

short vowel followed

a Sanskrit long vowel

by two consonants corresponds to

we have
maggo Skr. nijirga

thus

'

'

'
*
ratti Skr. ratri night'
path ; majjdro Skr. miirjara cat
'
saddhim Skr. sardham * with ; ikkhati Skr. Ikshati * to
;

look

*
;

place*;
'
'
urine

kitti

'

'

fame
tittham Skr. tirtha landingSkr. dhurta 'gamester'; mutlam Skr. mutra

Skr. kirti

t//<!^^o
;

suttam Skr. sutra.

PALI GRAMMAB.

An original long vowel following a simple consonant

can arbitrarily be shortened by doubling the consonant.
This seems only to be graphic, as in the metre no difference
is made between a form hahunnam and
bahunam, gen. plur.
m. and n. of ba/iu much,' or al/dpo and d/dpo 'speech.'
In the gen. plur. m. and n. of the numerals tinnam pahcannam channam the forms with doubled nasals are in use.
'

The
given

syllable
is

ya

is

changed

nigrodho for Skr.

to

i.

Among

the examples
for Skr.

nyagrodha, majjhimo

madhyarad. The process called samprasarana.

In the same way va is contracted into u in such words as
latukikd Skr. latvakii

quail.'

Pali has, as was shown above, no written character

corresponding to the Sanskrit r and / vowels.
6.

It is a well-known fact that those two vowels originate in

Sanskrit and other languages for the most part through the
abbreviation of a syllable which contains an r or /through

the influence of the accent.

Theoretically, therefore, one would expect

to find in Pali

a short syllable containing an r or / element. This r or I

find a whole
element may be inherent in the vowel.

We

syllable with the consonant r to represent the Sanskrit vowel.

r,

practically speaking, therefore,

is

represented in Pali by

one of the short vowels a i u or by the consonant r in conjunction with one of the vowels a i m, which in this case are
vowel fractures (svarabhakti).
There is no fixed rule for the use of these vowels, and in
difierent, sometimes in the same, texts, they are used inand the divergency
diflferently in the case of the same word,
in the use of these vowels shows that they were employed in
a merely tentative way to indicate the sound in writing.
*
krta made ; gmihdti Skr. grhnuti * to
1) a=r in kato Skr.
*
'
'
ianhTt Skr. trshna
lust.'
seize ; mato Skr. mrtd dead
'

'

done'
3)

'

Skr. rshi *a sage' ; kicco Skr. krtyd what is to be

'
*
'
pitthatn pitlhl Skr. prshtha back ; inam Skr. rn4 debt.'

2) i=^r in

M=r

isi

in samvitto Skr. saravrtd 'restrained'; uju Skr. rjd

'

straight.'

4)

r=r

in iritvyo Skr. ytvij *a priest'; iru Skr. re

'hymn';

LONG VOWELS.

'

'

hrohd Skr. brh&nt

great
5)

to increase
brmbayati
ruhkho Skr. vrkshd tree.'
or i or u in the same word :

Skr.

bi'uheti
*

r=

'

antelope ; accho ikko Skr. rksha

'bear*; pathavi put hurl Skr. prthivi 'earth'; sati sainuti Skr.
'
smrti * thought ; vuddhi vaddhi Skr. vrddhi * increase.'

mago Skr. mrga

niigo

The long r vowel is of later development in Sanskrit, and

has therefore no equivalent in Pali.
The so-called root klip, the only one which contains an
vowel, in Sanskrit becomes kappati.
7. In comparing Pali words with corresponding Sanskrit,
in several instances a difference in the vowels is to be found.
/

This

generally the case in unaccented syllables,

for such a practice lies in assimilaIn several instances, however, words are used with

is

and the reason

tion.

both vowels.
'

mind pana puna Skr. punar puriso

ucchu Skr. ikshu sugar-cane.'
puruso Skr. purusha 'man
Pukkuso Skr. Pukka9a
Kondantio Skr. Kaundinya
*

muti mati Skr. mati

'

'

candimd Skr. candramas

'

moon

'
;

saddhim Skr. sardham

'

'
to dislike ; timisam tamisam
jigucchati Skr. jugupsati
'
*
Skr. tamisra darkness ; Timingalo Titnihgilo Skr. Timingila ;

nutthubhati Skr. nishthiv

nitthuhhati
lindo
*

mucilinda

Skr.

venerable

'
;

a tree

'

to spit out

'
;

dyasma

Skr.

kutumbam kutitnbam Skr. kutumba

'
;

muca-

ayushmant
'

family.'

Where a difference in the vowel takes place in conjunction

with one of the semivowels or nasals, the vowels only designate a partial vowel, such as in garu Skr. guru, Greek ^apv,

LONG VOWELS.

8.

The long vowels a

i
u agree with the corresponding
with
the
Sanskrit,
exception above stated, that a long vowel
followed by two consonants is represented in Pali by
a short one.

1)

a:

Skr. datr
2) T

d=a

'the prep.' sddhu Skr. sadhu 'good'; data

giver.'
iti

Skr.

Iti

'

calamity

j'nitam Skr. jivita 'life.'

gltam Skr. gita

a song

'
;

TALI GRAMMAR.

6
3) u

&no Skr.

'

iina

deficient

*
;

8upo Skr. supa

broth

'
;

mulho Skr. mudha foolish.*

9. The long vowels e and o correspond to the Skr.
diphthongs e and o, and sometimes to the diphthongs ai an.
'

They combine
they go back

guna and vrddhi of

therefore

to these

and

u,

and

vowels accordingly, before a compound

consonant.
1)

e:

Skr. eti 'he goes'; ekam Skr. eka 'one'; hetu

eti
'

Skr. hetu

cause.*
'

'

contemptible
goes back to jigucchd
'
suffering from a cutaneous complaint to kilaso.
ediso eriso edikkho erikkho such to idam.
jeguccho

keldso

'

gelanfiam 'sickness' to gildno, in which, however, the

is

svarabhakti for Skr. gluna.

2)

E=Skr.

ai

Eravano Skr. AirJivana.

'

etihyam Skr. aitihya traditional instruction.'

ekdgdriko Skr. aikjigarika a thief.'
*

is

3) aya

'

contracted to e in the

to relate

kathayati

middle of a word

'

'
;

jeti^-jayati

katheti=

to conquer.'

4) e arises out the contraction of avi in e.g. thero Skr.

sthavira

an

elder.*

okam Skr. okas 'a house'; ojo Skr. ojas 'splendour';

covetousness from luhhati Skr. lobha to be greedy

1) o:

lobho

'

'

moho

delusion

'

'

pothujjaniko

puthujjano

belonging

this

latter

puthujjaniko, however,
2)

'

'

tnoho Skr.

'

o=Skr. au

opammam

is

doso Skr. dosha

an

to

stands

for

'

blemish.*

unconverted
Skr. prthak.

person,*

form

also given.

Skr.

aupamya 'comparison.'
'
orahbhiko Skr. aurabhrika a shepherd.'
odariko and odaro Skr. audiirika ' greedy.'
3) ava is contracted to o in the
fuller
'

form

descent

'
;

beginning of a word

the

almost always also in use: otdro and avatdro

okdro avakdro * vileness.'
is

sometimes arises from the vocalisation of v and its

4)
combinations with d as hoti=.bhavati and dhovati Skr.
\/dhav

'

to wash.'

CONSONANTS.

10.

THE NASAL VOWELS.

The

nasal of every class, if preceded by a vowel, may

arbitrarily become niggahlta.
They correspond in every
respect to Sanskrit.
For a nasalized vowel, a simple long one can be substituted:
nho ' lion ' for Skr. simha tlsati Skr. vim9ati. sam very
;

'
sdrdgo possessed of passion.*
Every one of the five nasals can, before any other consonant or nasal, become niggahlta. The MSS. vary greatly

often becomes sa

in the expression of the nasals

'

other,' pamha,
and
In
cases
the long
pofiha
panha 'question.'
very many
vowel and the nasalized vowel appear in the same word.
In later texts a short vowel is often nasalized nagaram
becomes nahgaram. This seems, however, a mistake of the
:

mn/io, anno,

Sinhalese copyists.
11.

INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS.

the side of hhlyo bhiyi/oz^Skr. bhuyas we find yehlmyyo

yehhuyo, which is a contraction of yad+ bhuyas.

By

Skr. a appears as u in the last part of such compounds as

addhagu katannu, which stand respectively for Skr. adhvaga

and krtajiia.
In merayam 'intoxicating liquor,' Skr. maireya, second e
appears in Pali as a. In milakkJw Skr. mleccho the Pali
It stands for mlaska.
preserves the older form.
We sometimes find the gunated forms of words in Pali by
the side of Sanskrit ungunated.

CONSONANTS.

12.

The consonants
*

into ghosavd

Ghosava
y, r,

/,

are divided

by the native grammarians

and
aghosd surd.' They are
sounding,'
d, dh^ n
d, dh, n
b, bh, m
g, gh, h j, jh, n
*

V, h.

Aghosa k^ kh c, cA
The simple consonants
:

t, th ;
t, th\ p, ph ; 8.
of Piili mostly agree with those of

Sanskrit and the other Indo-European languages.

TALI GRAMMAR.

The

Gutturals, Palatals, Linguals, Dentals, Labials, as well

and
and /t, correspond in Sanskrit and

as the semivowels
Pali.

Piili possesses all the consonants of Sanskrit, with the

exception of the palatal and lingual sibilant; the last of which is even
in Sanskrit of late origin, and occurs only in the numeral

and its derivatives, and in a few words in conjunction

with the linguals according to phonetic rules.
The dental
takes the place of the three sibilants of Sanskrit.
sibilant

8h(Vih

However, the aspirated surd palatal is found in, eg.

chokam Skr. 9akrt dung
chdpo Skr. yava young of an
chavo Skr. 9ava a corpse.*
animal
Skr. shash, which goes back to a form svaks, is represented
in Pali by the form cha and chal.
'

'

% 13.

None

PHONETIC CHANGES.

of the changes pervades the whole

grammar they
only take place optionally, and can scarcely be called conIn most instances the leading motive for the change
sistent.
;

euphony or false analogy in many instances also two

forms occur, of which one preserves intact the form known
is

from Sanskrit grammar.

General Remarks.
1)

the

For Skr. mleccha

form

Piili

is

has milakkho *a stranger.*

Piili

Here

the older one, just as in bhhakko Skr. bhishaj

physician.'
2) Palatals, in conjunction with
become sometimes dentals,

one of the semivowels

y, V,

3) Cerebrals /, M, can optionally be substituted for d, dh,

in the middle of a word between vowels, the difference only

being graphic,

e.g.

khiddd kild Skr. krTda

'

foolish

4)

and

'
;

play

dalho Skr. drdha

Through the
/*,

influence of

r,

the dentals are sometimes

dahali Skr. v/dah

to

burn

mulho mudho Skr.

mudha

firm.'

*
;

vowel or consonant, and

made

cerebrals, e.g.

daddho Skr. dagdhd

burnt.*

PHONETIC CHANGES.
ha to Skr. hrtd

'

seized

pati Skr. prati

9
*

to.'

upaft/idpanam Skr. upastliiipana providing.*

5) l=:d is substituted sometimes for n, e.g. muldlo Skr.

mrnala
6)

An

'

venu bamboo.'
interchange between d and r takes places,

lotus-fibre

ekdddsa ekdrasa

'

vein venu Skr.

'

eleven

ediso eriso

e.g.

in

such.'

7) The mutes of one class are occasionally used

mutes of another
Pakudho and Kakudho.
kipiUiko and kipi/lako Skr. pipllika ant.'

for the

gadduhano Skr. dadrughna good for leprosy.*

takkollam Skr. kakkola bdellium.'
'

samputito sahkutito sahkucito

'shrivelled';

and

cikicchati

jighncchd dighacchd Skr. jighatsa

8)

from Skr.

y/

tikicchali Skr.

kut or

cikits

\/

kuc

'to care';

hunger.'

For sonants the surds appear

pdtu Skr. priidur (in comp.).

'
akildsu Skr. aglasnu healthy.*
'

chakalo Skr. chagala a he-goat.*

palikho paligho Skr. parigha 'an iron beam.*
'
mudihgo mutihgo Skr. mrdanga a kettle-drum.*
thakam Skr. sthagana covering.'
'

'

chdpo Skr. 9a va young of an animal.'

paldpo Skr. palava chafi*,' perhaps through tbe influence
*

of paldpo Skr. pralapa

nonsense.'
'

and apdpurati Skr. ava-j- \/vr to open.' Several

derivatives of sad show t in the place of d.
9) An interchange between surd and sonants takes
avdpiirati

place, e.g.:

Sdgald Skr. Qiikala

dumb.'

elamugo Skr, edamuka

Nighandu Skr. Nighantu.

For the cerebral t in such instances
'

dlaviko Skr. iitavika

appears,

dwelling in forests
cakkabdio for Skr. cakraviita and cakrabala.
10)

We find v interchanged with p

This

'
;

last

in the

'

deaf and

e.g.

cakkavdlam and

same word, and

change seems only graphic,

kavi kapi Skr. kapi a monkey.'

vice versd.

'

e.g.

TALI GRAMMAR.

10

A change

takes place sometimes between the sonant

which the aspirate h is substituted.
lahu laghu Skr. laghu light
holi by the side of hhacati
but also idha and iha for Skr. iha hither,'
Skr. bhavati
where the original form is, perhaps, preserved in Piili.
12) n and / are frequently interchanged in Piili, e.g.
11)

aspirates, for

'

'

nahgalarfi lahgalam Skr. liingala *a plough'; pilandhanam

Skr. pinaddha ' an ornament.'

Semivowels.
1)

inserted in a

is

word

to avoid hiatus after a

has been elided between two vowels,

khadati Skr. v/khad
svadate * to taste.'

'

'

to eat

consonant

khdyito P.P.P. from

sdyaniyo from sdyati for Skr.

e.g.

For the same reason it appears as if y was interchangeable

with V in such words as dniso voc. to ayasma, where it stands
for duso.

y is interchangeable with r in antardrati and antardyati

'
run into danger Skr. antaraya danger, impediment
nahdru Skr. snayu * a sinew.'
3) r is interchangeable with /, e.g. taluno taruno Skr. taruna
2)

'

to

tender

'
;

cattalisam cattarlmm

Skr.

further in some of the numerals where

d, telasa terasa

and

'

catvarira9at
forty ;
r is interchanged with

tedasa Skr. trayoda^an 'thirteen.' jaldbu

'womb'; halidydhho haliddo and

corresponds to Skr. jariiyu

hari correspond to Skr. haridrabha and hari * yellow.'

4) Purindado, an epithet of Indra, corresponds to a Skr.

Purandara, the change being due to

false

etymology, just as

palihodha 'obstacle,' where two roots have been confounded.

5) For /, r is substituted occasionally, and the former is
kira Skr. kila they say
generally the original sound

in.

'

drammanam

'

Skr. iilambana

support, basis

'

*
;

arahjaro Skr.

'

alinjara

6)

waterpot.'

We find

for Skr.

in

bubbulam budbuda

'

a bubble.'

Nasals.

The MSS. greatly vary

No

in the expression of the nasals.

fixed rules can therefore be given, as also the native

COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
grammarians are

at

variance

however, be stated that

which then

r,

h and

in
s

this respect.
It may,
cerebralize a dental nasal,

interchangeable with the palatal nasal.

is

14.

COMPOUND CONSONANTS.

In the beginning of every Pali word only vowels, simple

consonants, or consonants in conjunction with the semivowels
means of eflfecting
y, V, r, occur. Assimilation is the commonest

This assimilation, of course, considerably alters

the shape of a word, and therefore, when a word commences
with a vowel or simple consonant in Sanskrit, in Pali also

this change.

a vowel or simple consonant appears; whereas, if a double

consonant, otherwise than in conjunction with y, r, v, commences a word, the corresponding word in Pali takes a
different form.

The same

rules

also apply to the

which apply

to the

middle of a word.

beginning of a word
Here, also, conjunct

consonants, belonging to different classes, are avoided

through the help of assimilation, or through the insertion
of a vowel.

The

rules of assimilation apply to the beginning of a word

and if, at the beginning of a word,

as well as to the middle,

a simple consonant is exhibited, the word takes in composition always the two sounds from which the simple sound
originated.
The chief rule for assimilation

is,

that of two consonants

The two
former
entirely assimilated to the latter.
the
one
was
a
the
other
a
are
assimilated
sounds, if
sonant,
surd,
the

(viz.

is

the final letter

a perfect assimilation
are not only

made

same order.

In

these processes

is

common with

to

is

assimilated to the following initial) ;

so that the two sounds

takes place,

belong to

one class, but also to the

be sufl&cient if the last of

Piili itself it will

pointed out, as the first has taken place in

other Indian dialects, anterior to the

fixing of the Pali language.

A second means of avoiding conjunct consonants was the
insertion of a vowel between two letters.
This could only

TALI GRAMMAR.

12
take place

when one

of the letters was a semivoicel or a nasal,

which the part of a vowel (svarabhakti) is

in either of

already inherent.
It remains

now

to consider the Phonetic changes

tuke place in the word

itself

which

1) It is self-evident that when two consonants belonging

to the same class meet together, they are preserved intact, e.g.
cittani Skr. citta

annam Skr. anna

2)

'

'

mind, thought

lajjd

Skr. lajja

shame

food..'

Mutes + Mutes are Assimilated.

k + t =tt

lattakam Skr. laktaka *a red dye'; wM/^d Skr.

'
raukta 'pearl ; mutto Skr. mukta * released.'

k-{-th=ztth

sittham Skr.

sakthi

siktha

'bee's

wax';

satthi Skr.

thigh.'

g-\-dh=.ddh duddho Skr. dugdha 'milked.*

g-\-hh=.bhh pahbharo Skr. pragbhara *a cave.*
*
sagguno Skr. sadguna good quality
d-\-g ^=gg

'

puggalo

'

Skr, pudgala individual.*

d-\-gh=:.ggh ugghoso Skr. udghosha 'proclamation'; uggharati
Skr. ud+ \/ghr ' to open.'

bubbulam Skr. budbuda 'a bubble.*

=^bb

d-\-h

d-\-bh = bbh
p-\-t =U
=^jj

b-\-j

b'\-d =.dd

b+dh=ddh

abbhufo Skr. adbhuta 'wonderful, mysterious.*

'
tatfo Skr. tapta
burnt.'
khvjjo Skr. kubja 'limping,*
saddo Skr. 9abda ' sound.'
laddho Skr. labdha ' taken.*

3)

Mutes + Nasals.
SVAKABIIAKTI.

ASSIMILATION.

\-n

sakunati Skr. 9aknoti

sakkoti

to

able.*

+m

rumma

+n

naggo
*

rukuma Skr. rukma

Skr.

naked

gh

gold.*

nagnd

'

aggini gini Skr. agni

aggi
4-

n agghd Skr. aghnat

kiUing.'

not

'

fire.*

be

SEMIVOWELS.
STAKABHAKTI.

A8SIMILATI0IT.

+n

'command.'

fl'ww Skr. ajnji.

Skr. jfiati

fidti

13

kinsman.'

{m

kudumalo Skr. kudmala *an

opening bud.'

sappatto
'

Skr.

sapatna

+m
th + n

mattho

grhapatnl

housewife.'

atumd Skr. atman

attd

jewel.'

Skr.

gahapatdnl
t

ratanam Skr. ratna

hostile.'

self.'

mathna

Skr.

shaking.'
rf

+m

chaddam Skr. chadman

'

padumam

roof.'

Skr.

idhumam Skr.

dh-\-m

padma

lotus.'

idhma

fire-

wood.'

-^-n

pappoti

pdpiinati

Skr.

prapnoti

he

obtains.'

4) Nasal + surd remains mostly unchanged.

*
However, by the side of amhd Skr. amba mother,' we
have amwd, and by the side of paaca
five,' paJihdsa and
pamidsa Skr. panca9at fifty,' where the nn is probably due
'

to the influence of

Further,
*

a utensil

'

s.

hhdjiako

'

jar

by

the

side

6) Of two nasals the first is assimilated

ninnam Skr. nirana 'depth.'

jammam

of

hhandaham

Skr. bhanda.

Skr.

janman

to the second, eg.

'birth.'

Semivowels.
6)

No fixed

labials,

rules can be given, y, after gutturals, palatals,

sibilant s, is either preserved or assimilated,

and the

alwaj's so that the semivowel is assimilated to the preceding

consonant (not as is the case with mutes in conjunction with

mutes where the first sound is assimilated to the second) or

a vowel is inserted between the mutes and the semivowel.

An

example will suffice

Sdkiyo Sakyo Sakko Skr. Qilkya.
:

PALI GRAMMAR.

14

7) j is made through the influence of // arbitrarily a dental

*
in dosino ISkr. jyotsnii a moonlit night,* but we have also
*
junhd ; daddallati Skr. jiijvalyate to blaze.*
*

a bowstring.*
preposition abhi before vowels becomes ahhha.
Is gheppati pass, to
have, of course, simple assimilation.
*=
take
Skr.
*to
grbhyate?
Vgrah
jijd eindjif/d Skr.

jya

We

8)

The

9)

In conjunction with the

we have

sibilants

dlasiyani diasyam dlassam Skr. alasya

sdlo Skr. 9yala

10)

kept

The

sloth.*

brother-in-law.*

dentals in conjunction with

y are

palatalized or

intact.

and ch sometimes represent the surd dentals when

followed by y and j, and j'h, the sonant dentals in conc

junction with

becoming

The dental nasal

y.

-\-y Ib

also palatalized,

tiFi.

The preposition adhi before vowels becomes aj'/ha ; ati in

'
form atyappo, is
the same way ace iti thus becomes ice.

'

of frequent occurrence, this form, however, only shows i=^y

before a vowel.

Other examples are

'
saceo Skr. satya
true
paecmo Skr. pratyiisha dawn
majjam Skr. madya strong
cdgo Skr. tyaga abandoning
Skr.
drink'; majjho
madhya 'middle*; hnjjo Skr. hrdya 'dear.*
in
conjunction with y, is either assimilated or both
11) r,
If
letters are preserved intact with intervening vowel.
:

'

'

assimilation takes place, r is always assimilated to y, thus

we find yy, not rr, which never occurs in Pali.
'
Cpr. ariyo and ayyo Skr. arya and arya noble.*
*
bhariyd and hhayyd Skr. bhiirya wife.'
*
kdn'yo and kayyo Skr. karya that ought to be done.*
12) In a few instances r+y is assimilated to //, as in
'
pallahko Skr. paryanka couch.*

is either preserved or y
kalldno Skr. kalyuna
and
kalydno
an arrow
mllo Skr. 5alya

13) l-\-y

'

is
'

assimilated to /=//.

fortunate.*

nallako

Skr.

9alyaka

porcupine.*
is

14) v-\-y is difierently treated if

in the middle of a word.

it

begins a word or

if it

SEMIVOWELS.

15

according to Burmese and Siamese manuscripts, becomes hy, whilst the Sinhalese write vy throughout at the
beginning of a word, vydmo or hydmo Skr. vyama *a fathom.'
vy,

This

often assimilated to v

is

In the middle of a word

with assimilation

From

vdio Skr. vyala snake.'

it is either written 6y, ty, or

though less frequently, yy.

man, a poet,' kahbam and kavyam Skr.

hb, or,

kavi *a wise

kavya
*

poetry.'
pattabbo, but also pattayyo
attainable.'

and pattabyo Skr. praptavya

The

preposition vi becomes by before vowels.

r, the metathesis vh
15) h-\-y appears as yh, just as for A
takes place. Besides this, we have assimilation and svarabhakti.

asayho Skr. asahya

from

;*

16)

'

lehya

participle P.P.

'

hiyo

and hiyyo

yesterday.*

heaven

'

*
dlgho Skr. dirgha long,' but
'
*
maggo Skr. marga
path ;

'

an oblong pond ;
digghikd
kakkatako Skr. karkataka * a crab.'

In sakkhard Skr. 9arkara

a potsherd,' we find aspiration.

*

accati Skr. -v/arc

tude

'

to

from decay';
*

Skr. Vgarj

to roar

'
;

'

honour

*
ajjavam Skr. arjava rectia cat
nijjaro Skr. nirjara
;

maijdro Skr. marjiira

'free

lick

before gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials

sibilant s is mostly assimilated.

saggo Skr. svarga

to

appear for Skr. hyas

and the

The

unendurable.'

leyyo Skr.

lehati is

khajju Skr. kharju 'itching'; gajjati

miicchd Skr. murcha ' fainting.*

*
pakinnako Skr. praklrnaka miscellaneous
'
wool
ramio Skr. varna colour.'

'
;

unno Skr. urna

Before dentals assimilation takes place, and the dental is

sometimes altered to a cerebral. The MSS., however, differ
greatly in the use of dental and cerebral letters.
*
have kitti Skr. kirti ' fame ; kevatto Skr. kaivarta

We

'

fisherman

'

vattati

and

vattati Skr. y/\rt

addho and addho

Skr. ardha' half.'

*

sappo Skr.
'

glad
'

sarpa
gabbho Skr.

kuca grass

karman

'
;

action

a snake
*

*
;

tappati

womb

garbha
dhamrno Skr. dharma
'

Nammadd

Skr.

'
;
'

Skr.

Vtrp

to

be

dabbho Skr. darbha

law

'
;

katnmam Skr.

Narmada Nerbudda.'
*

TALI GRAMMAR.

16

17) r-\-r=zbb: nibbdrtam Skr. nirvana (a technical term)

*

*
gnbbo Skr. garva pride
'
'
ubbt earth Skr. urvl.

'

pabbato Skr. parvata

mountain

'
;

In this combination both letters are preserved

18) r-\-h.
with or without an inserted vowel: arahu Skr. arhant; tarahi
*

'

*
garahati Skr. Vgarh to blame.*
19) If r follows gutturals, it is either assimilated or a
"vowel is inserted, and both letters are preserved. In case of

tarhi Skr. tarhi

then

assimilation the guttural is optionally aspirated.

cakkam Skr. cakra *a wheel*; akkodho Skr. akrodha 'mild*

be angry *
gdhati Skr.
to
take
Skr.
to
smell
ghdyati
aggo Skr.
-v/ghrii
-v/grah
'
*
first
kkiddd
Skr.
kild
Skr.
krida
;
kiriyd kriyd
kriya ;
agra
ness

kujjhati Skr.

-v/^rudh

to

'

play.'

20) For r

'

followed by a palatal cpr. vajiro Skr. vajra

*
thunderbolt,' and paj'tro Skr. pajra firm.*
21) Dentals followed by r are either assimilated or preserved
r sometimes aspirates a preceding dental. Optionally,
is changed to a cerebral.
In many instances

intact,
also,

we

the dental

find three forms

kutra, kuttha, kutta Skr. kutra

*

limb

'

sattu satthu Skr. 9atru

'

where

enemy

'
;

*
;

gattam Skr. gatra

bhadro bhaddo Skr.
'

bhadra good
Dd/nilo Skr.
giddho Skr, grdhra greedy
chuddho khuddho
Dravida dravo davo Skr. drava liquid
Skr. kshudra mean.'
;

'

22) After labials, r is assimilated: /)fl//Skr. prati (a prep.) ;

*
*
pa Skr. pra (in compos.) ; pdno Skr. pnTna breath ; pii/o
*

*
Skr. priya dear ; bhdmo Skr.
*
Skr. sa+prajna wise.*

br

is

preserved in

bhrama whirling
'

Brahmd

Skr.

Brahman

*
;

sappamio

bravlti Skr.

v/bru *to speak.*

mr is assimilated in the beginning makkheti Skr. v/mrksh
*
*
to anoint' ; miyyati miyati Skr. v/mr to die.'
:

For mr

mango

in the middle of a word, cfr.

tree

'
;

tambo Skr. tamra

ambo Skr. amra

to

walk

'

the

copper.*

23) v-\-r in the beginning of a word is assimilated to

the middle of a word it always becomes bb.
vajati Skr. \/vraj

hut pabbojati Skr.

pra+

r,

in

v^vraj

SEMIVOWELS.
*

to

vajo Skr. vraja *a

go forth';
*

suvrata

conscientious

'

'

to hear
*

charge

but

hrada

sharp.*

'

corner*

sauu Skr. 9va9ru

;
*

Skr.

sitnoti

assavo Skr. asrava

y/<}r\x
*

dis-

Skr. 9ri fortune,' with svarabhakti.

*
ahirikd Skr. ahrl
cp. hiri Skr. hrl shame'

assimilated

8iri

25) For /i r,
*
shamelessness

is

asso Skr. a9ra

'

pupil, follower
*
assu Skr. a9ru a tear

'

mother-in-law

cow-pen*; subbato Skr.

tibbo Skr. tlvra

24) r, after sibilants,

sdvako Skr. 9rdvako

17

'

hrasva

Skr.

rasso

'

short

rahado Skr.

a pool.'

assimilated before gutturals and labials.

*
Skr.
phaggu
phalgu reddish.'
'
'
*
*
appo Skr. alpa little
kappo Skr. kalpa period of time ;
*
*
'
jappo Skr. jalpa word, speech ; goppho Skr. gulpha ancle.*

26)

/ is

27) Through metathesis gumbo Skr.

simbali Skr. ctilmali * cotton-tree.*

For /+ V

28)

cp. kibbisam Skr. kilvisha

and bailava

also beluvo Skr. bilva

29)
sin

'

bald

gildno

fault

billo,

the vilva-tree

'

but

khallato

'

Skr.

kilissati

kloman

'

'
pallalam Skr. palvala small tank.'
after gutturals shows svarabhakti in kileso Skr. kle9a

Skr. khalvata
*

thicket

gulma

v/kli9

'

suffer

kilomakam Skr.

kilamati Skr. V^lara

right lung
Skr. glana ' faded
;

to

'
;

and from

gelanmm is formed, see 9. akildsu

Without svarabhakti kleso sin.'
30) For / after labials cp.
pilavo Skr. plava a kind of duck
piluvati and plavati Skr.
spleen

to be tired

'

an abstract

this

Skr. aglasnu

'

healthy.*

'

'

'

pihakam Skr. pllhan

'

to float

; plavo
Skr. plava * a raft.*
ambilo Skr. amla 'sour*; milakkho Skr. mleccha 'stranger.*
31) After r, / is assimilated in dullabho Skr. durlabha.

32) For

siloko Skr.

after sibilants cp.

'

9loka

'

'

phlegm

stanza

Skr.

silittho

'

9lagha
praise
mansion.*
33)

y/^\\x

For h + l

asilesd

cp.

'
;

sileaumo semho Skr.

Skr.

9leshman

9lishta

adhering
'

a9le8ha

hilddati, hilddo,

sildgha

name

hilito

Skr.

of

Skr.

a lunar

^lilad 'to

be glad.*
.2

PALI GRAMMAR.

18
34)

in conjunction with gutturals in the middle of a

assimilated thus pnkko Skr. pakva 'cooked.' In the

r,

word

is

beginning of a word, kathito Skr. y^kvath

35) For V after palatals op. jaldti
intensive daddallati Skr. jajvalyati.

to

36) V after cerebral: kinnam Skr. kinva

37)

t?

boiled.*
blaze,'

and the

'

yeast.'

AFTER DENTALS.

tvam 'thou';

tvam, tiivam, tarn Skr.

t-\-V'.

1)

'

tarati Skr.

In cattdro Skr. catvaras

in
ittaro
Skr.
and
itvara
four,'
going,' we have assimilaIn caccaro Skr. catvara *a court' v was changed into
tion.
The gerundial suffixes
p, which then palatalized the t.
v/tvar

taco Skr. tvac 'skin, bark.'

ivdna and tra are mostly preserved, but sometimes hdna

is contracted into tuna.
IriMjo Skr. rtvij 'an officiating
priest.'

2) d-\-v'. dlpo Skr. dvlpa 'an island'; doso Skr. dvesha

For Skr. dvi, as
'hatred'; saddalo Skr. 9advala 'grassy.'
the
forms
dve
and
duve
occur ; in comnumeral,
separate
position, however, dvi^ di, du and hd
'
*
twelve ; hdvlsati Skr. dvavim9ati.

bdrasa Skr. dvada9an

dh-\-v=dh: dhajo Skr. dhvaja 'flag'; dhamseti corresponds to Skr. -v/dhvams to fall, to perish,' and in composition
'
uddhamseii dhani Skr. dhvani sound
addhd Skr. adhvan
3)

'path.'

38) V after sibilants is mostly assimilated :

'
'
a9va horse ; bhassaro Skr. bhasvara

asso Skr.

brilliant.'

In the beginning of a word 8V is sometimes preserved. We

find also svarabhakti and assimilation,
sdmi and suvdml Skr.
svamin * lord.* sd Skr. 9 van dog,' has the following forms
svannam and
besides
aono, suno, sdno, svdno and snvdno.
'

'
saggo Skr. svarga
Borpiam correspond to Skr. svarna gold.'
'
the
but
are, sure Skr.
heaven, paradise,*
adjective soraggiko.
'
'
'health.*
soithi
and
suratthi
Skr.
svasti
9vas yesterday ;

39) Through metathesis h-^v has become rh in jirhd Skr.

'
savhayo Skr. sahvya called, named.*
jihva tongue
'

'

gahhharatn Skr. gahvara

'

cavern.'

40) Sibilants in conjunction with the surd letters.

Following or preceding the surds, the sibilants are always

SIBILANTS.
assimilated

19

mostly an aspiration of this combination takes

place.

Skr. ksh becomes kkh and cch

1) cakkhu Skr.

cakshus 'eye'; Rakkhaso Skr. Eakshasa;

tree
hhikkhu Skr. bhikshu a mendi-

Skr. vrksha

riikkJio

some of the words exhibit

Skr. shk and %\.=-kkh.

both forms.

'

'

cant'; khalati Skr. v/skhal *to tumble'; khandho Skr. skandha

'
*
shoulder ; khattiyo Skr. kshatriya * member of the second
caste
*

'

'

khayo Skr. kshaya

decay

khipati Skr,

Vkshlv

to spit.*

2) kacchd
'

belly

kaksha

Skr.

a girdle

chamd Skr. kshama

3) akkhi acchi Skr. akshi

'

kukshi

Skr.

kitcchi

earth.'
'

eye

ikko, accho,

and with a
'

*
singular assimilation iso and isso Skr. rksha bear ; khuddo
chuddho Skr. kshudra 'small'; chano khano Skr. kshana

a wing

kshuUa
Skr.
*

moment,
'
;
*

festive

time

'
;

khuro Skr. kshura

small
'

nishka

'
;

pakkho paccho
*

razor

'

sakkato Skr. samskrta

a golden ornament

'

Skr.

paksha

cullo, culo, culo

'

Sanskrit

'
;

Skr.
nikko

nikkeso Skr. nishke^a

bald.'

*
9C=ecA: acchariyo Skr. accarya wonderful ';/)accAd
'
'
'
Skr. paccat behind
a scorpion ;
vicchiko Skr. vr9cika

4) Skr.

'

nicchinati Skr.

ni8+ Vci 'to ascertain.'

and ps become alike cch.

5) t%
hibhaccho Skr. bibhatsa

Skr.

Vda)

cikitsati
;

to

cure

'
;

loathsome

acchard Skr. apsaras

'

cikicckati tikicchati

Skr.

dicchati

macchari Skr. matsarin

ditsati

(desid.

to

selfish.'
'

nymph

lacchati

Skr.

lipsati

(desid. to v/labh).

tth: ^(//Aa^i Skr. tishthati 'to stand'; yittho Skr.

6) 8htshth
ishtk P.P.P. to Vyaj 'to sacrifice'; attha Skr. ash tan 'eight' ;
'
*
*
chattho Skr. shashtha ' sixth ; hhattJio Skr. bhrashta fallen ;

mattho and matto Skr. mrshta

'

'

polished

hhattho

and

hhatto

Skr. bhrshta' fried.'

*
a clod of earth,' is supposed to stand for Skr.
7) leddu
loshta.
The modem vernaculars, however, show the forms

lendu

and

leddu.

8) Skr. st

and sth are generally represented by

tth.

This

PALI GRAMMAR.

20

atthi Skr. asthi 'bone*;

optionally be cerebralized.
be'; hatthl Skr. hastin 'elephant/ and

may

atthi Skr. asti *to

without aspiration atto Skr. asta thrown.*

9) In the beginning of a word cp. thakanam Skr. sthagana
'
*
thamhho Skr. starabho
thdnam Skr. sthana
covering
;

'

standing,' and other derivatives from Vsthji with

zation
*

a tope

perhaps
sthiinu

Skr.

thero

'

thcvo

to

drop,*
*

chamhhati Skr. \/stambh

stump of a tree.*

cerebrali-

Skr.

ihupo
stQpa
Skr. ^/stip, and
'
to amaze ; khdnu Skr.

priest
*

and chevo

'

sthavira

10) In conjunction with the labials the sibilants are assimilated ; sometimes an aspiration takes place.
The characters
for /), ph being very much alike in Siamese, Burmese and

Sinhalese MSS.,

it is

very

difficult to

more than

if this is

say

graphic.
11) phasso Skr. spar^a 'touch'; phusati Skr. y/^VT9 '^
touch' ; puppliam Skr. pushpa 'flower'; by the side of pupphiio
a form phitssito occurs, both going back to Skr. pushpita
'flowering.'
'

*
12) happo Skr. vashpa a tear ; apphotd Skr. asphota
Skr.
'jasmine'; nippapo
nishpapa 'free from sin'; nippaco
*
*
*
Skr. nishpava
acwinnowing, clearing ; mpphddanam

complishment,* to nipajjati Skr.

*

nishphala

nij^phalo Skr.

nis+Vpad;

fruitless.'

41) Groups of nasals with sibilants following are treated in

ways
1) The group is preserved intact ; 2) be-

difierent

and the nasal a vowel is inserted 3) the

changed to A, and metathesis takes place. In the
beginning of a word assimilation may take place.
In several instances a word appears under more than one form.
tween the

sibilant

sibilant is

1) sineho sneho Skr.

love

*
;

sneha

'

'

friendship ; nisneho
'
'
Skr. sniina
bathing

sindnam nahdnam

without
siniddho

'

niddho Skr. snigdha * oily ; snnhd smiim husd Skr. snushu

'
'
Sumeru probably belong
sister-in-law ; Sineru Neru

Mem

and point to a form Sneru.

2) panhi Skr. pr9ni
variegated

together,

'

'

'

question ;
Skr. krshna

tasind Skr.

tajihd
'

black

'
;

'

unho Skr. ushna

pmiho Skr.

;
*

trshna
'

lust

hot.'

'
;

pra9na
kanho kasino

SANDHI.
*

3) aitam mihitam Skr. smita

*

'

21

smile

'

massu Skr. 9ma9ru

;
'

;
gimho Skr. grishma summer ; asmd am/id Skr.
'stone'; semho silesumo Skr. gleshman 'phlegm'; rasmi

beard

agman

'

'

ramsimd Skr. ra9mimat

ramsi Skr. ra9rai a ray of light
*
radiant
apamdro apasmdro Skr. apasmara epilepsy.'
4) In the oblique case of the pronoun sm is optionally
*

'

changed into mh, and thus

also in the

form of

the^ verb,

subst. anihi asmi amlie asme.

42) In combination with nasals, h shows svarabhakti or

metathesis.
'

'
hanute hnute Skr. hnute
ganhati Skr. grhnati to grasp
'to conceal oneself' ; cihanam cinham Skr. cihnana 'mark,
;

*
jimho Skr. jihma crooked.'
43) Groups of three or more consonants are treated like

sign

Assimilation takes place, in

those consisting only of two.

some instances svarabhakti.

The repreupwards.'
of course, due to the different assimilation which
just as in disvd, and less frequently datt/iu, for

uddham uhhham Skr. urdhvam

sentation

is,

'

took place
Skr. drshtva v'dr9; uddhumdyati (pass.) Skr. ud+\/<ihma 'to
'
*
be blown up
tikkino tikklio tinho Skr. tikshna
sharp
;

'

sanho Skr. 9lak8hna

'

'

moonlight

smooth

'

jiinhd dosino Skr. jyotsna

'
*
entire ; satti Skr. 9astri
kasino Skr. krtsna
;

'knife'; idattat/am=.idam-\-frai/a; lacchati Skr. lapsyati fut. to

'
*
checchati fut. to chindati Skr. -v/chid to cut
macco
\/lahh
;

Skr. martya

'

mortal

'
;

maccho Skr. matsya

adra 'wet'; vatumam vattam Skr. vartman;

strl

'

'

'

alio

Skr.

itthi itthi thl

Skr.

fish

woman.'

44) Three consonants are only allowed in conjunction with

the semivowels.

15.

SANDHI.1

In the preceding paragraphs the phonetic changes which

take place in the midst of a word have been considered.
It remains now to be seen what changes take place in the
>

Cpr.

On

Society, 1879.

Sandhi in Pall by the late R. C. Childen, Journal Royal Asiatic

PALI GRAMMAR.

22

None

sentence.

known from

of the Sandhi rules

Sanskrit

We

have of course
grammar as imperative are so in Pali.
external
in
as
internal
Sandhi
to
deal
with
Sandhi
Pali,
only
has been treated under the heading of phonetic changes, to

which it properly belongs.

In prose the MSS. differ greatly in the use of Sandhi, and
whilst, for instance, Burmese and Siamese MSS. prefer
writing khvdham, the Singhalese MSS. separate the words
into kho aham.
In verse Sandhi of course takes place
according to the exigencies of the metre. Later texts, such
as ""the Dipavamsa, take great liberties, omitting whole
syllables, etc.

The following tables will

that occur

show the most frequent changes

VOWEL

SANDHI.

VOWELS IN COMBINATION VHTH VOWELS.

a+a=:id'. ndhosi=na ahosi.

a+a+coNjUNCT coNSONANT=a

na 'tthi=na atthi; pana

annam=:pan' annam.
ndssa=na assa.
flf4-fl+ CONJUNCT CONSONANT =d
a before a is rarely elided. Such elision generally takes
:

aham

place before
*

verb atthi

1/ ai/am

this,'

and the forms of the

to be.*

d-\-h=d: taddyam=tadd ayam

iaddsi=tadd

dai.

d-{-i=:e: bandhuss 'eva=.bandhussa ica.

=
+ iti=. d

d+^
a

a-\-piz=.

nopetizn na upeti.

dpi

+ M=u

Tissdti vacancna
:

ajjdpi

= Tissa Hi.

= ajja.

cubhayam-=.ca

ubhayam

tadup(f

tadd upa-

sammanti.

a-{-i=d (elision of i): yena *me=yena ime. This elision

seems only to take place in case of the pronoun idam.
a+t or M= or w (elision of a) pahdy* imam=pahdya imam ;
tatr' idam-=tat)'a idam; yass* indriydnznyassa indriydnii; ten*
:

upa8ankami= fena upasahkami.

VOWEL 8ANDHI.
a

is

elided before d u e o: yen* di/asmd

um\

dcuso; eken* uno-=.ekena

tass' okdsam.

netv'

23
;

uithdi/*

ekamantikam

dsand
\

idh*

etarahi

o*

d sometimes elides a short vowel, and less often a long

vowel other than d disvd 'panissayam for diavd upan ; sided
:

*va for sutvd eva.

is

often elided before a long vowel or a short followed

by a conjunct consonant
eva=neti'd ek.

tath' eva=.tathd\ netv*

ekamantikam

d-|-i=e in seyyathldam=.seyyathd idam and saddhidhdzs,

saddhd idhd.
elided before short or long vowels
gacchdm* aham
a
dasah'
gacchdmi
p' ajja=-pi ajja
upagatam-=dasahi upa.
i is elided in timh' a^sa=.tmihi assa.
is

+t=l:
i-\-a=.a
i

in combinations with

iti:

samanUdha=.8amantiidha.

(more frequently kiticid apt).

and followed by a vowel becomes fy:

kihcdp)i=.kinci api

preceded by

or

tt

ayam ti ayam. The examples are from

late Pali works, and are perhaps doubtful.

jlcanty elaka

ty

itl-\-ecam: ity evam, but also according to the rules after

which
etc., as

is

iy

palatalized ice evam,

and thus di=jj

api=app,

14, and ifv evam.

pointed out above,
elided before a vowel: samef dyasmd=sametu

dvuso=-sadhu

tusites' upapajjat/iaz=tusitesu

d;

upa.

u-\-i=.u~^ sadhuti=.sadhu iti; kitnsudha=-kimsu-\-idha.

The examples
5efore a vowel changes into v.

doubtful
e

may

sadh*

are

vatthv* eva-=vatthu eva.

be elided before a long vowel: w' d8i=me dsi; stlavant*

ettha-=.sllavanto ettha.
e

sometimes elides a following vowel:

te

'me=^te ime; sace

'jja=ajj'a.

e+a=.d

sacdham

= sace + ahaip

e-\ra=jyi the a being lengthened: tydham=.te aham. After

louWe consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily.

aham

pattiko

*vaz=eva; kattahbo' posathe=.k upo.

is elided before a vowel
kuV eUha=kufo ettha

katam'

often elides a following vowel: so '/iam=.so

assa^^katamo

assa.

PALI GRAMMAR.

24

o+a=d: duJikhAyamdukkho

ayam.

the a being lengthened: 8vdham=-80 afiam; khvd'

After a double consonant lengthening takes
aham.
ham=.kho

o+a=r,

place arbitrarily.
becomes v before a long vowel.

EUPHONIC CHANGES.

16.

word ending in d, is followed by idam, or one of

oblique cases, y is inserted na yklam, na-y-iinassa.
1)

If a

its

words ending in vowels or nasal vowels

2)
becomes viya sometimes e.g. kim v'uja like what.
u.
3) V is inserted if a vowel is followed by u or
in
vowels
or nasal
words
after
becomes
eva
yeva
ending
4)
iva

after

vowels.
6)

inserted between two vowels

is

idha-m dhu:=idha

dhu; jeyya-m attdnam=jeyya atf\ idha-m-ijjhati, giri-m-iva.

in a vowel is followed
6) r is inserted when a word ending
and vijjur eva.
dhiratthu
vowel:
with
a
by a word commencing
satthud
anvayo.
7) d\a inserted in sammad eva, anvad eva,

These consonants have been inserted according

to false analogy.
few instances occur of the original consonant reappear8)
which,
according to the phonetic rules in Pali
ing

should be omitted.
\
yasmdd apeti (and so
tasmdd eva=ta8md; kenacid eva; ahud eva (Skr.

manasdd atmavimxittdnam-=mana8d
in Sanskrit)

abhud eva)

puthag eva (Skr. prthag eva) ; pageva (Skr.

tunhltn
dslnam (Skr. tushnim) ; vuttir esd (Skr.
prageva) ;
eva (Skr. sadbhir eva) ; pathavi dhdtur
sahhhir
vrttir esha)
;

eva=dhdtu
punar eva)

eva (Skr. dhiitur eva)

;

punar eva=puna

eva (Skr.

hhattur atthe=hhattu atthe (Skr. bhartur arthe)

chal eva (Skr. shad eva).

final
9) The niooahTta stands sometimes for an original

consonant.

This can be replaced by an original consonant

sakim stands for Skr. sakrt, and before eva it

before vowels

becomes aakid

eva, in

10) The same

is

accordance with Sanskrit.

the case with tarn

yam

etam, which stand

DECLENSION.
for tad

vowels

26

yad etad respectively, and appear in

:

tad eva

this

shape before

etad avoca.

to false analogy, wrong consonants sometimes

the
side of the right punam eva for punar, artnad
appear by
atthu for annam, hahud eva for hahur.

11)

Owing

12) Original double consonants which are assimilated are

sometimes after vowels doubled.

13) In verse the niggahTta

is

elided before a consonant

maccdna jlvitam
muhceyya candimam for munceyyam
etam huddhdna sdsanam for buddhdnam sds.
for maccdnam
14) Sometimes the nasal vowel 4*ntirely elided im* etam
z=.imam etamy^mp ajf aha m =. nipajjim aham,
am-\-a=a: ekam iddham samayam; ekam idam aham;
no

ce

evdyam=evam ayam.
it

15) If a word ends in niggahTta and a consonant follows,

to the nasal of that class to which the con-

may be changed

sonant belongs: tn-\-k-=nk, m-\-c:=nc, m=^tz=nt, m-\-t=-nt,

m-\-p'=^mp.
16)

word ending in the niggahTta, followed by a word

beginning with
kannam.
17)

y,

becomes nn

The niggahTta

We

tarn yeva=.tanneva

dnantari-

before h optionally becomes n

17.

1)

evanhi.

DECLENSION.

have drawn attention in the chapter on Phonetics

to the fact that Pali only allows vowels and nasalized vowels
at the end of a word.
Through this law the shape of a word

considerably altered. Roughly speaking, vowels are either

substituted at the end of a word, or those consonants which
is

would impede the action of

this law are dropped.

consequence of this process is, that, although the essential
features of the various Sanskrit declensions are preserved,

no declension has kept within its proper range.

2) The nominative case as a prototype case has influenced
the other cases, and since stems e.g. ending in as or a alike

PALI GRAMMAR.

26

form the nominative case in

o,

the as and a declension follow

respectively the analogy of the as or o declension.

3) Besides this the influence of the declension of the

pronouns on the declension of nouns has to be noticed,

and vice vend.

Pali distinguishes three genders masculine, feminine

and neuter, two numbers singular and plural, and, including
the vocative, eight cases. In the declension of neuter nouns
and of pronouns some traces of an old dual are to be found,
which will be noticed hereafter but practically speaking
:

4)

the dual

is

extinct.

5) The Piili grammarians recognize six case relations,

which by their name indicate the functions of the cases.
The nominative and vocative cases are of course omitted in

this enumeration.

6)

The nominative

case

is

simply called the

first

case

(pathamd). It simply expresses the subject. It is sometimes

used instead of the vocative, which latter is called the
*

alapanam
7)

show

the addressing case.*

The names given

respectively to
their relation {karakam) are :

kammam

accusative.

karanam

instrumental.

sampaddnam
apdddnam

ablative.

nissakko,

dative.

sdmi

genitive.

okdso or ddhdro

locative.

Other terms are

and

the other cases to

for the accusative upai/ogo, for the ablative

for the locative

hhummo.

USES OF THE CASES.

I)

The relation of the Accusative (kammam).

accusative
transitive

is

The

used as the case of the direct object of a

The transitive verba have a somewhat

verb.

wider range in all the Indian languages than in the related

ones, and so we find an accusative as the goal of motion

USES OF THE CASES.

27

*
bringing,* sending/ etc.
*
gantid having gone to the monastery/
Verbs of peaking may follow the same rule.

with verbs of

idam abruii

Vihdram

going/

'

Tarn rdjd

said this to him.*

the king
is further used to denote space traversed
'
and duration of time. Patindsa yajandni gacchati he marches

The

accusative

fifty yojanas.*

used with verbs signifying to have recourse, to appear,

Buddham saranam gacchdmi ' I take my refuge in
the Buddha.*
Causative verbs have a double accusative.
Updsakam mam
It

is

to ask.

hhavam Gotamo dhdretu

a

'let

the lord Gotama receive

me

as

disciple.*

The

accusative is used with the following prepositions

*
Sangamam pati pihd longing for union.*
pati
*
rukkham pari in the direction of the tree.*
pari :
:

anu

arm

Sdriputtam pannavd

hhikkhu

inferior to S. in learning.*
anto,antara: antara vUhim olokayamdno 'looking
the street.'

a priest

down

into

gdmam 'round the village.'

bhdvam gacchati he goes out of sight.*
relation of the Instrumental (karanam).

abhi abhito: abhito

tiro

II)

The

tiro

The

instrumental

denotes

adjacency, accompaniment,
All the uses
instrumentality.
of this case may be derived from its original meaning.
notice particularly the use made of the instrumental
association,

and of

course,

We

to denote 1) equality, likeness, accordance, default

*
Rdgena samo aggi ndma natthi there is no fire like lust/
:

akkhind kdno

blind of one eye.*

2) the space traversed and duration of time

'

nabhasd gacchati he goes through air.'

3) the construction of a passive verb or participle

evam me

mtam

'

was heard by me.'

4) the prepositions aaha saddhim vind, though generally used
with the instrumental, are also found with other cases
Saha gabbhena jiiitakkhayam pdpunissdmi I shall perish
thus

it

'

together with

my

unborn child

*
;

Mahatd

bhikkhu'Sahg/ieiia

PALI GRAMMAR.

28
*

saddhim
*

vind

dosena

The relation of the Dative (sampaddnam)

[effect-

without any
Ill)

'

with a great company of priests

fault.*

ing case]. The case of the indirect object. It is used to

denote objects * to, towards, for, at, against,' which, anything
is

done or intended.
It is used, therefore, with words signifying
Maggam dehi rahno
1) give, share out, and assign
:

room
2)

'

make

for the king.'

Show, announce, declare

tut/ham avikaromi

'

tasaa abruvi

said to

him

*
;

I will explain thee.*

3) Give attention, have a regard or feeling, inclination,
'
obeisance Bhavato bhaddam hotu may good happen to the
:

lord.*

4) In an infinitive sense
the world.'

'
:

lokdnukampdya

lY) The ablative relation (apdddnam).

out of pity to

The 'from'

used to denote removal, distinction, separation,

issue, deprival, restraint: mdtito sudd/io '.pure on the mother's
'
side
avijfd paccayd sahkhdrd.
It

case.

is

As

special applications, we notice

1) the ablative after words expressing fear in interchange
with the genitive : Sahbe bhdyanti maccuno or maccund ' all
fear death.'

2) the ablative of distinction: yato panitataro id vaaitthataro

whom there is none better or more ac-

vd natthi 'than

Also
complished.'
instrumental.

The

in

interchange with the genitive and

is used with the prepositions and adverbs

the
notion
of distance, removal, such as dra * far
implying

off';

ablative

purd

formation

which are ablatives according to their

dsavakkhayd he is far from the extinction

formerly,'

drd

so

his arriving.*
The case relation is
[sdmi].
an adjectival one, out of which all other uses arise.
It is to a great extent interchangeable with IV) the

of passion*

t<u%a

dgamand purd before

V) The genitive relation

locative [okd8o]y the

Thus we

in' case.

find a locative

and genitive absolutely employed

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
rudato ddrakassa or rudantasmim darake

Evam

'

'

29
'

whilst the child

was crying
having
In connection with verbs and substantives denoting either
;

vutfe

said thus.'

possession or dominion, either the genitive or locative is used.

The locative is used interchangeably with the accusative,

instrumental, dative, and ablative.

Among prepositional uses of the locative

we

notice upa

and

adhi having respectively the sense of inferior and superior to.

'
'
Upa khdriyam dono a drona is inferior to a kharl ; adhi
devesu

Buddho

Buddha

is

superior to the gods.*

In interchange with the instrumental, the

with adjectives of the sense of

shall

now

declensions, of
I.

II.

satisfied, eager, zealous.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

I.

"We

locative is used

give the paradigms for the

which we make two divisions.

different

Stems in vowels.
Stems in consonants.

We shall mark those forms which belong to the pronominal declension with f, those which are taken from
another declension with *, obsolete forms with
:{:.

STEMS IN YOWELS.
Masculine and Neuters in

a.

Dhamma.
SINGULAR.

PLURAL.

Nom. dhammo
Voc. dhamma dhammd
Ace. dhammam
Instr.

dhammena

dhamma
dhamma
dhamme

J dhammase

vinaycL

dhammehhi dhammehi

dhammdnam

dhammassa

Dat.

dhamtndya

Abl.

dhammd fdhammasmd
t dhammamhd

dhamynebhi dhammehi

Gen.

dhammassa

dhammdnam

Loc.

dhamme f dhammasmhn
fdhammamhi

dhammcsu

\
30

STEMS IN VOWELS.

31

SIN'OVLAB.

Ahl.

Gen.

Loc.

aggini faggimhi faggismim

oggind faggimhd f aggismd

*

aggino

The

voc. sing, of
to Sanskrit rshe.

From muni
Of
occur

ddi

isi

a sage

*a recluse' the
'

'

starting-point

aggibhi

agglhi

agglnam

aggissa
'

agglsu

occurs as

loc. sing,

uy

corresponding

occurs as mune.

the following locative sing, forms

ado,

ddu corresponding both to Skr. adau, * ddim f ddiinhi

f ddismim.

The neuters
paradigm

aithi

in
*

follow the declension of those in

a bone

'

will be given.

in.

As

PALI GRAMMAR.

32

PLIRAL.

SINGULAR.

Dat.

nadyd

nadiyd

nadlnam

najja

nadihi

Abl.

nadlhhi

Gen.

nadlnam

Loc.

The

nadiyani

nadiyd

loc. sing,

of

itthi, thl

woman/

following forms

nadlsu

najjam

Bdmmsl

is

given as Bdrdnasim.

corresponding to Skr.

shows the

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

Nom.

strl,

itthi

Voc.

itihl

Ace.

itthim

thl

itthlyo

thl

itthlyo

itthiyam

itthi

thiyo

* itthi

thiyo

* itthi

*
itthlyo

Instr.

itthiyd

thiyam

itthlbhi

Dat.

itthiyd

thiyam

itthinam

thlnam
itthlhi

itthlhi

Abl.

itthiyd

thiyam

itthlbhi

Gen.

itthiyd

thiyam

itthinam

thlnam

Loc.

itthiyam

itthiyd

itthlsu

thlsu

Declension in

u.

Bhikkhu.
SINGULAR.

Nom.

bhikkhu

bhikkhavo

Yoc.

bhikkhu

bhikkhavo

bhikkhave

bhikkhiim

bhikkhu

Ace.

bhikkhu
* bhikkhavo

Instr.

bhikkhund

Dat.

* bhikkhuno

Abl.

bhikkhuno

Gen.

t bhikkhumhd
bhikkhuno * bhikkhussa

bhikkhunam

Loc.

t bhikkhusmim f bhikkhumhi

bhikkhusu

bhikkhuhi
* bhikkhussa

t bhikkhusmd

We have in adverbial

bhikkhu

bhikkhubhi

bhikkhunam
bhikkhubhi

bhikkhuhi

bhikkhusu

use the gen. sing, heto and hetu from

hetu.

The

influence of other declensions

nom,

we

find in such forms as

plur. oi jantu and hetu jantuyo jantuno, hctuyo hetuno.

Masculines in u agree with those in m, showing the long u
:

in the nom. voc. ace. plur.

In those forms
formations according to other declensions, e.g.

sabbatmu
abhibhu

sabbammno
abhibhuvo

abhibhuno

we have
:

also

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.

33

Neuters in u form their nom. ace. plur. either in u or uni.

The form of the aco. sing, in m is also used for the nominative.

Feminines in
Jamhu.
8INOULAB.

&.

TALI GRAMMAR.

34

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

Acc.

aatthdram

*8atthd.ro

satthare

*
Instr. aatthard * satthund aatthdrd satthdrebhi satthdrehi
* satthmsa
satthanam * satthdnam
Dat.
safthtt
*
*

mtthdrdnam

satthuno

Abl.

sat (hard

mtthdrd

Gen.

satthu

satthiissa

Loc.

satthari

With

sattharehhi * satthdrebhi

aatthatiam * satthdrdnam
* satthdnam
sattharesu

the declension of satthd, that of pita nearly agrees.

SINGULAR.

Nom.

pita

Voc.

pitd

Acc.

pitaram

Instr. pitard

Dat.

*satthdresu

PLURAL.

pitaro

pita

pitaro
*
pitare

*pitund

pitu *pitu8sa *pituno

pituhhi

pitunnam

pitaro
*pituhi

pitHnam

pitarehhi

pitdnam

*pitardnam
Abl.

pituhhi

*pituhi

*pitarehhi

*pitareh,i

pitunnam pitunam
*pitardnam
pitusu

*pitusu

pitdnam
*pitare8u

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.

35

The word corresponds to the Skr. sakhi, which shows an

The same irregularities we find also in
irregular declension.
Piili, and besides this we find the influence of other deThe forms are not marked.
clensions.
SCrOULAK.

Nom.

sakhd

Voc.

sakhe

Ace.

sakhdram

Instr.

sakhind

Dat.

sakhissa

Abl.

sakhind

sakhi

sakhl

sakha

sakhd

sakhdyam

sakhdnam

sakham

sakhino

Gen.

sakhissa

Loc.

sakhe

Nom.

sakhdyo

sakhino

sakhdno

Voc.

sakhdyo

sakhino

sakhdno

Ace.

sakhl

sakhino

sakhdyo

Instr.

sakharehi

sakhdrehhi

sakhehi

Dat.

sakhinam

sakhdrdnam

Abl.

sakharehi

sakhdrehhi

sakhehi

Gen.

sakhardnflm

sakhdrdnam

sakhinam

Loc.

sakkhdresu

sakkhesu

II.

sakhino

Stems in Nasals.

sakhdno

PALI GRAMMAR.

36

The form
find

is of comparatively rare occurrence.

Ace. sing, dtumdnam

tltumd

Nom.

ace. plur.

Gen. and

dtum&no
dtumdnam.

dat. plur.

Brahman.

We

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.

37

PALI GRAMMAR.

38

word has only preserved a few

traces of its belonging to this

class.

Besides the regular forms of the a declension of kammam,

find the instr. sing, kammund kammand, the gen.
sing.

we

kammuno, and the loc. kammani.

In several instances forms of the an declension are in
adverbial use only.

2)

Declension of Stems in mant

SmOULAR

SmOULAB

UASC.

Nom. gnnavd

vanf.

NBTTT.

Ace.

gunavam
gunavam
*gimard *gunava
*
gunavantam gunavam
gunavam

Instr.

gunavatd

Dat.

gunavato

Abl.

gunavatd

Gen.

gunavato

Loc.

gunavati

Voc.

Instr.

gwiavantena

Nom.
Ace.

*gunavanto

gunavantassa
*

f gunavantasfnim -fgumvantamhi

*gu7iavante

gunavantehhi

gunavatam

Abl.

Gen.

gmiavatam

Loc.

gunavantesu

gunavassa

gunavantassa

*gunavante

gunavanto *gunavantd

Dat.

gunavassa

*
*

gunavanti

gunavantam

gunavanti

gunavantdni

gunavantehi

gmiavantdnam

gunavantehhi
*

gunavantdnam

The corresponding feminine is made by adding t to either

the strong or weak form gunavanti or gunavati. It is then
declined like a form l.
:

The

like those in mant,

participles in ant are declined

the exception of the nom. sing, case, which

*gacchanto.
Compare further

is

with

gaccham or

Nom.

sing,

arahd and araham

mahd

mahaw

'

venerable.*
*

mahanto

'

great*

STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
San/o P.P. to

shows the following forms

atf/ii

'

to be.'

39

40

PALI GRAMMAR.

optionally in verses;

the forms with long vowels are the

more frequent.
Notice nom. plur.

The word
asthi,

d'lpiyo,

from dipl *a panther.'

'

atthi a bone/ corresponding

shows the following forms
:

to Skr. asthan

and

PALI GRAMMAR.

43

II.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
1)

Personal Pronouns.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.

43

44

PALI ORAMMAB.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
3)

Relative Pronoun.

45

46

PA

NUMERALS.

47

'higher'; adharo 'inferior'; uhhayo 'both*;

dakkhino 'right*; piibbo 'former';

'other';

and sabbo all, every.'

Some few of these words form
to the nominal declension.

aparo paro
visso

'all*;

their cases also according

NUMERALS.

20.
Cakdinals.

ekam

eko

ekd

2
3
4

dve

duve

panca

cha {chat)

satta

8
9

nava

10

dam

11

ekarasa

12

bdrasa

13
14

catvddasa

cuddasa

15

pancadasa

pannarasa

16

solasa

tayo

ubho (for

all

3 genders)

tint

tisso

cattdro {caturo)

catasso

cattdri

attha

ekddasa

dvddasa

tedasa

terasa

telasa

coddasa

sorasa

17

sattadasa

satlarasa

18
19

atthddasa

atthdrasa

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

risad

ekunavisam

ckunavlsati

visam

ekatlsati

ekavUam

dvdvlsati

bdvisafi

tevlmti
catuvisati

pancavUati
chabblsati
sattablaati

atthavlsam

sattavisati

pannarasa

PALI GRAMMAR.

48

Cardinal*.

29
30
31
32
40

ehunatimmm
timaa

ekatimsa

dvattimm
catfdlisam

tdlisam

50
60
70
80
90
100
200
1,000

ehunatimsati

timsati

cattdrlsam

talisa

pannasam

pannasa

pannasa

safthi
sattati
aslti

navuti
sfl^;,

bdmtam

dvdsatam

sahassam

10,000

dasasnhassam

nahiitam

100,000

satasahassam

lakkham

1,000,000

100,000,000

From

koti

dasamfasahassam
Icoti

upwards

eacli

times the preceding one.

succeeding numeral is ten million

After the combination with koti,

pakoti kotippakoti and nahutam ninna/nitam akkhohini and

The last
bindu, the succeeding numerals are neuters in am.

numeral given is asankhej/f/am=10,000,000^^.

In combination with una 'deficient, less,' the eka is in
some instances omitted, as unasattamtam 699.'
addhiko 'exceeding, surpassing,' is used sometimes to
*

saftddhikavlsa '27,'
denote the higher number, e.g.
7 exceeding 20 atthdramdhikam dvisatam *218.'
:

i.e.

The following forms

26
44
66
84
Fractionals are
addfio

of numerals ought to be noticed.

pannavlsati
cuitdllsam

cattallsam

chappannasa
caturdsVi

ctd/dsiti
:

nddho *J*; ditjaddho diraddho,

*
2^ addhuddho 3^.'
'

addhatiyo

paTicavisati

*1J';

addhateyyo

NUMERALS.

49

Other combinations with addho are frequent,

500
addhatelasasata * 1250.'

sata

'

'

\.'

For the other

To form the

fractionals the ordinals are used.

multiplicatives khattum
16 times.'

is

used

ckakkhattum

once,' solasakkhattum

To form adverbs from numerals the

used

dasaddha'

catutthamso

e.g.

'

suffixes

dhd and sa are

ekadha

in one

'

way

ekasa 'one

by

one.*

Adjectives are formed with the suffixes tvV/AOj^fwno and ahgiko:

'
'
'
*
atthavidho
eightfold ; navaviddho ninefold ; sattagum
*

sevenfold

'

'

'

atthangiko

eightfold

*
;

pancahgiko

Declension of the Cardinals.

eka.

fivefold.*

60

m
THE ORDINALS.

51

THE ORDINALS.
The

by means of

ordinals are formed from the cardinals

are declined like adjectives.

The fem. ends,
with exception of the first four numerals which form their
stems in a difierent way, in I, the neuter in am.

suffixes.

They

For the ordinal of one, pathamo, pathamd, pathamam is used.

From dva and ti we have dutiyo fem. dutiyd^ neut. dutiyam
;

tatiyo fem. tatiyd, neut. tatiyam

The

cardinals for *4,' '5,' * 6,' '7' form the ordinals

adding iha catuttho, pancafho, chattho, sattho.
For * 4 ' a form turlyo with the fem. turiyd occurs.

by

Besides the form in tha the suffix

'

ordinals,

5,'

6,'

*5th'; dasamo

'

so/asawo

ekarlsatimo *2l8t';

',

timsatimo

added to form the

is

and onwards up to

7,'

10i\i'

ma

*99,*

e.g.pancamo

16th'; ekunavlsatimo '\Qi\x''y

*
30th ; satthimo *60th.*

Besides these longer forms from 10 upwards,

made from the cardinal by the suffix a

ordinal

'

15th
pancadaso
23rd ; ekunatimso
'

'

pamiaw 50th
navido

The

we

find

an

'

'

'

vlso

;
'

29th
*

sattho

'
;

60th

20th

thmo
*
;

'

'

ekavlso

;
*

30th

sattato

'
;

2l8t

'

cattdhso

70th

'
;

aslto

ievlso

'

40th

'

80th

'

90th.'

ordinal for 100

is

and with the fuller superlative

1000 sahassamo and sahassatamo.

satamo,

suffix sataiamo, just as for

The fem. of some of the

ordinals

is

used to designate the

day of the month, e.g.

*
paTicaml the fifth day of the half month.*
:

ekddasi

the eleventh day of the half month.*

*
the fifteenth day of the half month.*

pa/icadasl

21.

THE VERB.

The native grammarians divide the verbs according to the

manner in which the present and the tenses and modes which
belong to the present system, viz. imperfect, potential and
These are called
imperative, are formed into seven classes.
from the verb which serves as prototype for the whole class :

PALI GRAMMAR.

62
*

i.e.

1) hhavddiy

hhu and the other verbs/ or

having hhu

at the beginning.'
2) rudhddi.

3) diiadi.
4) svcidL
5) kiyadi.
6) tanadi.
7) curaiddi.

First class

It consists of the following divisions

The

root ending in
bhava.

1)

^bhu

To the

or

is

ti

gunated, and a added

ending in a consonant an a is added,

^9- ^/pac-\-a-=.paca 'to cook*; further, y/tiid *to gnaw';
y/nud to remove
yjlikh to write
\/phus to touch.'
2)

root
'

'

'

'

3) To the root ending in a vowel, the personal endings are

added without intervening vowel, e.g. \Jyd to go.*
The second class comprises those verbs in which a nasal
*

is

inserted before

the final consonant of the root.

terminations are added with an intermediate a as in the

class

rundhati

y/riidh,

The
first

to restrain.*

The third

class adds ya to the root.

The phonetic rules
*
regarding y are applied y/div^ dibbati to play.'
The fourth class adds nu nd una to the root stmoti
:

pdpundti.

The
kindti

fifth class adds

to

The

'

buy

dhundti

tid to
*

the root which ends in a vowel

to shake.'

sixth class adds o or m to the root.

The

root

generally ends in a nasal tanoti, karoti.

The seventh class adds aya eiio the gunated root: corayati
Every verb is supposed to have two voices with separate
:

endings

the parasaapadam or transitive, and attanopadam or

intransitive.

and

it

is

The attanopadam

very restricted in

is

its use,

give the attanopadarn for

therefore difficult to

every verb.

The
root

passive verbs are formed through adding ya to the

affixing the ending of the attanopadam, or though

and

less frequently of the

The

parassapadam to this base.

tenses of the Pali verb are

m^mmm

THE VERB.

53

Special tense

and derived from it two modes:

and
Imperative {pancamt)

1) Present {vattdmdnd),

Optative

(sattami)

the Participle Present aa verbal adjective.

2) Imperfect {htyattanl).

General tenses
1) Perfect (jparohkhd).

2)

Aorid

{ajjatanl).

3) Future (bhavtssantl).
4) Conditional (kdldtipatti)

The general

tenses often

and vice versd.

can appear in

tenses,

A verb
changing

daddti, deti
*

vajjeti

its

meaning,

and

different classes without, however,

e.g.

dajjati

take the basis of the special

titthati

to give

and

thdti

to stand

'
;

vadati, vadeti, vajjati

'
;

and

to speak.'

Other roots appear in different classes with a differentiation

'
of meaning, such as, e.g. '^/vid, vidati to know ; vindati to
*
and vijjati to be, to exist.'
find, to get
1) It is needless to advert to the fact that the classes have
*

'

'

been made up to a great extent to bring the conjugation of

Pali in a closer connection with that of Sanskrit.
2) The tenses of the Aorist and Imperfect are simply
tenses of the past, and it is therefore not advisable to take

the Imperfect separately from the Aorist. It is quite true

that originally there existed a difference in the meaning
between Aorist and Imperfect ; but in the Pali texts, as they
lie

before us, no such difference can be traced.

"We

shall

therefore consider the Imperfect simply as a tense of the past

not dependent on the Present system.

3) The Perfect tense is of rare occurrence.
I.

The Present System.

PALI GRAMMAR.

64

IMPERATITB ATTANOPADAM.

niPBRATlTE rAEASSAPADAM.

mi

1)

hi

2)

2) tha
3) anfu

iu

3)

ma

1)

1)

2) asu

2) vho

3)

OPTATIVE PAUA8SAPADAM.

1) e

eyydmi

eyydma

1)

2) e eyydsi

2) eyydtha

3) c cyyrt

3)

1)

Verbs which

3) antam
OPTATIVE ATTANOPADAM.
<a;w

1) eyyam
2) e^Ao
3) e^Aa

eyywn

"We best divide the verbs

dmase

1) e

1)

eyydmhe

2) eyyavho
3) erawj

into the following classes

affix

the endings given above without

intervening rowel.
2) Reduplicating class.
3)

Nasal

class.

4) a- class.
5) ya- class.

The Root Class

I.

of Sanskrit

grammar.

Through the

contraction of aya into e, of ava into o, many verbs follow

now the analogy of this class. These are either primitive
verbs such as j'eti for j'ayati, or derivatives such dpddeti for

Most of the verbs have forms in other classes.

dpddayati.
distinction between strong and weak forms takes place

only occasionally.

We give as paradigms

^Jya
Plu.

\/i

Sing, emi

Plu. ema

ydmi

ydma

yd^i

ydtha

ydti

yanti

Sing,

etha

esi
eti

enti,
*

Like emi, semi

yanti

to lie down.'

The

third person attanopa-

dani occurs as

Sing, sete

Plur. sente

Verbs following the analogy of ydti

*

to protect

bhdti

'

are, vdti

'

to

blow

'

to shine.'

pdti
Besides the forms, according to the reduplicating class,
'
and thd * to stand/ we have deti fhati,
o( y/dd 'to give
which follow the analogy of ydti.
;

In the same way a contracted form of verbs in

follows this class,

e.g.

aya, ava

PRESENT TENSE.
koti,

a contracted form of

shows the following forms

66

b/tavati,

\/bhu

to exist,'

which

Plur. homa

Sing, homi
host

hotha

hoti

honti

y/bru 'to speak' exhibits besides the form braviiif a contracted form bruti.

Plur. brUma

Sing, brumi

The ATTANOPADAM

bmsi

brutha

bruti

bravanti

is

Plur. br&mhe

Sing, brave
JrMse

br-Avhe

JrS^e

bravante

The most important verb

of this division

is ^/as

amhi

Plur. asma

amha

Sing, asmi
asi

ahi

santi

atthi

and

to be.*

attha

Single forms following the

III. p. sing, vatti

V vac

first class are, e.g.

to

speak,' at the side of vacati

vadati.

III. p. sing, hantiy yjhan,

III. p. pi. duhanfi, y/duh

'

to strike.'
'

to milk.*

III. p. pi. lihanti, y/lih *to lick.*

*
III. p. sing. att. hanute, y/hnu to conceal oneself.*
II.

Reduplicating Class.

The present form is formed by prefixing a reduplication

The rules of reduplication are
The
consonant
of the reduplicating syllable is always
1)

to the root.

the

first

2)

consonant of the root.

non-aspirate

is

substituted in reduplication for an

aspirate.

3)
*

A palatal is substituted for a guttural or

The

//.^

substitution of the palatals for the gutturals shows that the vowel of the
was uiuformly an #, as in Greek.

reduplication syllabic

PALI GRAMMAR.

66
4)

A long vowel is

shortened in the reduplicated syllable.

Examples of reduplication are

yjda to give.*
*
dadhdti, dahdti y/dhd to put.'
dadiifi,

titthdU, y/thd
*

to stand.'

to leave.'

jahdii, ^/hd
*

y/hu to sacrifice.*
*
or
pibati,
pivati ^pd to drink/ cpr. Lat. hihere.
conjugation is as follows :

jiihoti,

The

y/dd

Sing, dadami
daddsi

Plur.

damma
dattha

daddti

dadanti

In analogy with the first pers.

created, viz.
dammi, dasi, dati.
Besides these forms we have

new

plu. a

singular

was

This formation is
ya class.
according
probably due to the optative. The form deti was noticed
the

to

dajjati

above.

Of the attanopadam only a few forms can be

I. sing,

dade and

I.

y/thd
Sing, titthdmi

III.

Plur. titthdma

titthasi

tkdtha

titthati

titthanti

The Nasal

fourth, fifth

quoted, viz.

plur. daddmase.

Class

and sixth

In

it

we comprise

titthatha

the verbs of the

classes of the native

grammarians.
stem
in
form
their
the
fourth and
present
by adding
They
sixth class no if the root ends in a vowel, o if in n, or as in
the case of karoti in

These verbs add arbitrarily also nd,

r.

the class-sign of the fifth class. The few verbs belonging to

that class always retain the class-sign na.

As paradigms may

serve

'

y/su

Sing, aiinomi,

to hear.'

sundmi

suTiosi,

sunasi

sunoti,

smiati

Plur.
sundst

mnoma,

simdma

aunotha,

sunatha

siinanti

PRESENT TENSE.
In the same way y/tan 'to
the attanopadam occurs as

stretcli' is conjugated, of

'

to

Plur. tanumhe

tanme

tanuvhe

tanute

tanvante

'

buy has only the forms

in a kindmi.

The most important verb belonging

*

to this class is

to make.'

Sing, karomi
karosi

kummi

karoti

Plur. karoma

karotha
karonti

The aUanopadam shows the following forms

Sing, kuhhe
kuhhase

Plur.

which

Sing, tanve

y/ht

67

^kar

PALI ORAMMAE.

68

A consonantal

stem

is

y/tud *to push/ which

exactly like bhavatO

'
*
y/rudh to restrain has the following forms
Sing, rundhdmi
rundhaai

and

is

conjugated

rundhlmi
rundhisi

rundhati

rundhlti

Plur. rundhdma

rimdhlma

rundhatha

rundhltha

rundhanti

rundhinti

A few verbs form their present tense by adding ccha to the

*

y/gam to go,' gacchdmi.

There is, however, also a form gamati *he goes* and
ghammati. This latter form can be substituted for all the
root, e.g.

forms of the verb.

The

Cpr. further

hravlti.

ya Class: The present tense of this class adds ya

These form the third class of the native

the root.

to

All

grammarians.
applied, e.g.

22.

the

phonetic rules regarding

y are

\/div

-\-

ya

y/siv

-\-

ya

=
=

sihhati

y/yudh

-\-

ya

=.

yujjhati

dihhati

MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.

It is formed by adding the endings given

1) Imperative
on page 54 to the present stem. The second pers. sing. par.
sometimes show the mere stems without the characteristic
:

ending.

As paradigms may

serve
*

y/i
I. sing,

II.

III.
1

The

Sanskrit,

,,

emi

to go.'
I.

ehi

II.

etu

III.

plur. etna
etha
,,

entu

difference between these two conjugations can only be traced in

where the accent is varying.

MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.

*

s/as

atthu

III.

'

\/da

II.

attha

III.

8antu

to give.*

imperative can be formed from

use, e.g.

asma

I. plur.

ahi

II.

An

to be.*

sing, asmi

I.

59

all

the stems

in

II. sing, dehi daddhi dajja

II. plur. detha daddtha

The attanopadam has the following forms

I. sing,

dade

II.

dadassu

III.

dadatam

I. plur.

daddmase
dadavho

II.

dadantam

III.
'

II. sing,

III.

y/kr to make.'
II. plur. karotha
karohi
III.
karontu kuhhantu
kurufu

kuru
karotu

ATTANOPADAM.
sing, kuhhe
II.
kurussu

I.

I.

III.

plur. kubbdmase

II.

kurutam

III.

kuruvho

kubbantam

^Jbhu.
II. sing, bhava

III.

II. plur. bhavatha

bhavdhi

bhavatu

III.

bhavantu

ATTANOPADAM.
II. plur. bhavavho

II. sing, bhavassu

III.

bhavatam

III.
*

y/gam

bhavantam

to go.*

The Imperative is formed also from all the stems in use,

II. sing, gaccha,
gacchdhi,
ghamma, ghammahi

^.^7.

2) Optative It is formed by adding the endings given

The endings showed originally only forms
on page 54.
:

combination, however, took place

commencing with ya.
in most cases with the final vowel of the stem.
These forms

could again be contracted into

As paradigms may serve

e.

y/bhu.
I. sing,

heyydmi, bhaveyya
bhave
huveyya,

I.

plur.

heyydma

60

GENERAL TENSES.
The endings

are

61

FOR THB PARA8SAPADAM.

I.

sing, a

I.

II.

II.

III.

III.

FOB THE ATTANOPADAM.

plur.

mha

I.

ttha

II.

sing, i
ttho

III.

ttha

Boots ending in consonants insert an

mhe
vho
re

between stem and

consonantal endings.

As paradigms may

serve

y/bhu.
I.

sing, bahhuva

I.

11.

babhuve

II.

III.

babhuca

III.

plur. babhuvimha

babhuvittha

babhuvu

ATTANOPADAM.
sing, babhuvi
babhuvittho
II.

II.

babhuvittha

III.

I.

III.

,,

1.

plur. babhuvimhe

babhuvivho
babhuvire

TALI GRAMMAR.

62

for both forms, which, however, turns out futile.

no

difference

Moreover,
can be made in the syntactic use of the two

tenses.

The paradigm of the native grammarians

hlyattanl (imperfect)

is

for

the

ATTANOPADAM.
I.

II.

sing, a

I.

,,

III.

plur.

amhd
attha

II.

III.
PAUA88AFADAU.

I. sing,

II.

III.

For the

im

I.

plur,

ttha

tthum

III.

aj/atani (aorist)

mhase

rham

11.

se

ATTANOPADAK.
I.

sing,

im

I.

plur.

II.

II.

III.

tm

III.

imhd
tttha
inisu

PARA88APADAM.
I. sing,

II.

I.

III.

plur. imhe

ivham
u

II.

ise

III.

"We can distinguish altogether three different formations

The augment a is in prose generally put before the
In verse it is omitted according to the exigencies of
verb.
in Piili.

the metre.

With

the negative particle

md

the aorist

is

used

as an imperative.

First Formation.
PA&AS8APADAM.
I. sing,

II.

III.

am

I. plur.

a,

amha
attha

II.

III.

urn

ATTANOPADAX.
I.

I. sing.

II.

III.

The

first

pcrs. sing.

plur.

dmhase

acham
atthum

III.

attha

nasal in the

plur.

II.

ase

is

often omitted.

AORIST AND IMPERFECT.

Only verbs

63

form their preterite according to

This formation can
Its use is very limited.

in consonants

this formation.

be considered as an imperfect
stem.

if it is

used with the present

Second Formation.

isum

G4[

AORIST AND IMPERFECT.

II. sing. agaTichi

III.
II.

II. plur. agailchittha

agancho

III.

agaTichi

and III.

sing, agacchiai
y/vac.

I.

65

agailchimm

PALI GRAMMAR.

66

25.

The

FUTUEE.

tense sign is ss, which is added to the root directly, or

the
The endings are :
by
auxiliary vowel i.
POB THB FARA88APADAM.
I.

CONDITIONAL.
In the same way

eti

'

to

67

has, besides

go

the

future

essatiy ehiti.

The contracted form

forms
I.

from hhavati shows the following

sing, hemiy hehdmi, hohdmi^ hessami, hehtssdmi, hohissami.

II.

hest, hehisi, hohisi, hessasi, hehissasi, hohissasi.

III.
I.

hoti

heti, hetiti, hoiifi, hessati, hehissati, hohissati.

hehdma^ hohdma^ hessdma^ hehissdma, hO'

plur. hema,

hissdma.
II.

hetha,

hehittha,

hohittha^

hessatha,

hehissafha,

hohissatha.

III.

henti, hehinti, hohinti, hessanti, hehissanti, hohissanti.

From
att.

y/su

'

to hear

future

att.

sussam,

^dd

dassati

and

dassam,

26.

Prom

CONDITIONAL.

the future stem

prefixing the

augment

is

made an augment

preterite

by

a and adding the secondary endings

PARASSAPADAM.

I. sing,

II.

ssam
{ssa)

II.

ssd (ssa)

III.

8se

III.

I.

plur.

ssdmhd
ssatha

ssamsu

ATTANOPADAM.
I.

sing, ssam

I.

II.

ssase

II.

III.

III.

ssatha

The endings are added with

The paradigm is

plur. ssdmhase
ssavhe

ssitmu

or without intervening

/.

PARASSAPADAM.
I.

sing, abhavissam

I.

II.

abhavissa

88e

II.

III.

abhavma

88d

III.

plur. ahhavissdtnhd
abhavissatha

abhavissamsu

ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing,

II.

III.

abhavissam

I.

abhavissase

II.

abhavissatha

III.

plur. abhavissdmhase

abhavmavhe
abhavmiiMU

PALI GRAMMAR.

68

27.

The

DERIVATIVE CONJUGATION.

derivative conjugation

headings
I. Passive: It

may

be divided under

five

formed through adding ya

is

to the

weakest

The endings

are those of the altanopadam^ but also

the
those of
parassapadam occur, y affects a preceding con-

form.

sonant in the usual way. In a few instances iya is added

instead of ya, and the endings of the passives are added to
the present active.
Cpr.
vasiyati

from y/vac

iicchate vuccati

e.g.

from

*to

\/va8

dwell.'

to speak

'
;

vussati

kayyati karlyati kariyyati

*
kayirati are given as passive to karoti.
dlyati from y/dd to
*
to stand'; gamynte, gamiyaii
give*; thlyate from \/thd

gacclnyate
'
to take.'
II.

^J

gam

to

'

go

gheppati and gayhati to ganhati

The Intensive or

Frequentative

Its conjugation

reduplication.

second conjugational

the reduplication,

class,

formed

is

by

in accordance with the

is

however,

is

peculiar.

The reduplicating syllable is composed of a single consonant with a heavy vowel Idlappaii to lament
ddddallati
'

'

to blaze.*

The reduplicating syllable has a final consonant taken from

This consonant is a nasal which
the end of the root.
substitutes

any

consonant

other

cankamati

jahgamati

cahcalati.

Not many instances of the intensive are met with.

III. The Desiderative
The desiderative stem is formed
:

from the simple root by the addition of a reduplication and

by an appended sa. This sa affects of course the preceding

Some

consonants.

roots

traction of reduplication

form an abbreviated stem by a conand root together in one syllable.

Examples are, huhhukkati, yhhiij', pivdsati, y/pd\ vlmamsati

mimams jigimsati, \/hr dicchati, y/dd.
From every root can be formed
IV. The Causative

for

a causative

this is

done by affixing aya to the strengthened

P^LRTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.

grammarians range these verbs under the

Tlie native

root.

seventh

69

class.

This aya can optionally be contracted into e. Besides this

formation, another is in use : apaya contracted into ape is

added

A diflferentiation of meaning is sometimes

to the root.

to be traced.

If contracted into
first

e,

the conjugation follows of course the

the forms in aya and apaya are

conjugational class;

conjugated like bhavati.

As causative of y/gam

to

'

go
*

gacchdpetiy gacchapayati

V. Denominatives

The

a denominative.
'

e.g.

ciceitdyati

From
sufiixes

'

piittlyati

has haneti, ghdteti.

'

to splash

'

every noun may be formed

employed are aya, aya, lya.

The Participle Present

1)

are given gamayati, gameti

to kill

to treat as a son.'

PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.

28.

and

yjhan

anta,

which are added

formed by the

is

suffixes at

to the present stem, e.g.: gacckanto

gaccham (see above, page 38). In the same way these suffixes
are added to the future stem, to form 2) Participle Future.
In the same way the suffixes mdna and dna are used for
the Present Participle Attanopada.

Perfect Participle in vams only a few

left,
tndu and viddasu for vidvams.
4) The Past Participle Passive is formed by the suffixes
ta and na, which are added directly to the root or through
an intervening vowel i. Of course all phonetic changes
3)

Of

the

doubtful traces are

take place
kato
'

'

touched

shaven
5)

made

'

*
;

'
;

From

'

laddho

dinuo
the

'

'

gone

gato

taken

'
;

vutto

icchito

wished

'

spoken

vapifo

phuttho

and

vufto

given.*

Past

Participle

Passive

is

formed a

secondary derivative with the meaning of a Past

Participle by adding the suffixes rat, rant, e.g.

Active

hutavd hutavanlo

manditard, manditahaving sacrificed

*
vanto having adorned
hhtittard having eat^n.*
II. Gerundives
The suffixes by which gerundives are
;

'

PALI GRAMMAR.

70

regularly and ordinarily formed are ya tavya (tabba tayya)

aniya.
They are joined with or without intervening vowel i.
: bhabbo for
bhavyo; karanlyo kdriyo kayyo kayiro kattabbo
e.g.
:

ought to bo done
be given.*
to
ought
that

Gerunds

ddtayyo ddtabbo ddtabyo

that

The gerund is formed by the suffixes tvd

and tuna.
They take arbitrarily the vowel i

III.

ya tvdna
between root and ending.

Sometimes the

suffixes

ya and tvd

are united into one.

Remarkable forms are

and

datfhu

disvd

having

having known.'
having thrown.*

'

dhacca

dhanitrd

pappuyya

pdpayitcd

seen.'

anuviditvd

anuvicca

having obtained.'
having laid aside.'

vineyya

vinayitvd
*

nicchcyya having ascertained.'

*
Cpr. further passitvdna and passituna having seen.'
atmtvd and atikkamitvd 'having approached.*
:

datvd, ddya, daditvd

having given.*
having made.*
gayha, ganhiya, ganhitvd having taken.*
katvdna, kdiuna

'

IV. Infinitives
They are formed by the suffixes turn
The infinitive can be formed from the
and
tave,
rarely tuye.
or
from
the root
in both cases an i is
special base,
:

arbitrarily inserted
*
to
e.g. gantum
*

speak

*
;

laddhiim
go
sunitum and aotave to hear

up

ganetuye

to take

*
;

vaditum

'

*
;

vippahatave

to

to give

to count.'

29.

INDECLINABLES.
I.

Adverbs.

ADVERBS FORMED BY SUFFIXES.

Classes of adverbs are formed

by the addition of adverbial

pronominal roots or stems, but

stems.
and
noun
adjective
suffixes not only to

also to

INDECLINABLES.

Most of these

sufl&xes

71

belong to a time anterior to the

and the

fixing of the Piili, as a comparison with Sanskrit

cognate languages will show.

1)

to

standing for an original

which

word

It gives to the

tas.

added mostly an ablative sense, but sometimes

It may be added to pronouns, prepositions
In the last case it is regarded as the regular

it is

also a local.

and nouns.

substitute for the termination of the ablative (see page 41).

'
'
Examples are from pronominal stems ato hence ; i(o
:

'

here

tato

From prepositions
From noun and

2)
3)

pitthito

'

Adverbs of a

II.

This tra

is

(page 16).

'

abhito

t/ato

near

from what
'

parato

'

etc.

further.*

adjective stems: aggato 'before*;

'
*
south ; sahbato * from every side ;

on the
from the back

dalikhinato

from that place

'

*
;

pitito

on the father's side.'

formed by an original

local sense are

tra.

either

preserved or assimilated to

It

added to pronominal roots and nouns.

Examples are

is

or ttha

ita

'

'

1) atra, attha here ; tatra and tatiha

'
kuttha where,' 2) annatra and annatlha
'
yattha, ubhayatta in both places.'

'

there

'

elsewhere

kutra and
'

ubha-

dha and assimilated ha also form adverbs with a local sense.

are used promiscuously: t'ha and idha 'here.'

The forms

Interchangeable with this last suffix are ham and him

'
*
forming local adverbs kuhirn, ktiham, kaham where ;
:

also

taham, tahwi
III.
suffix
*

as

'

there

'

*
;

yahini

where.'

Adverbs of manner are formed by means of the

thd mostly from pronominal roots tathd so
yatha
'
but also from adjectives, e.g. sabbatha in every way
*

'

annathd

By

'

in another way.*
means of the suffix

extensively

used

in

ti

cases

or Hi.
of

This adverb

indirect

is

very
of

or

narrative,

enumeration, or of quoting the words and thoughts of others.

By means of the suffix or ira ' like as.' By the side of

iva also viya

eva
'

and

thus

'
;

and

va.

yera, heca
'
'
kiva how ?

The former seems a metathesis

*

just,

even

'
;

evam related

IV. Adverbs of time are formed by means of the

of iva
to

suflix

dd

em
:

PALI GRAMMAR.

72
*

when

'

hadd

whenever

ya</d

and sabbadd

sadd

'

always.*
*

Related to da seems di in padi if.'

2. By means of the compound suffix
ddnlm.

means of the

By

3.

seldom etarhi

'

now

'

now

iddni, iddnim

suffix rahi (Skr.

tarahi

'

ddnim

ddni,

taddni, taddnim

etarahi,

rhi)

for

then.*

and

then.*

means of the suffix dhd are formed adverbs,

from
numerals, signifying fold, times.'
especially
'
*
'
in one way
etc.
bahudhd * in many ways
Cpr. ekadhd,
V.

By

everywhere.*
used with the same sense

Sometimes we find the

'

sabbadhd

suffix d/ii

sabbadhi \see page 49).

VI. Adverbs of quantity, or measure, or manner, are
formed by means of the suffix so, Skr. 9as. e.g.
bahuso
:

'

'

'

greatly
atthaao

fives

by

paTicaso

akkharaso

letter

by

letter

'
;

according to the sense.'

VII. Case Forms used as Adverbs.

A large number of adverbs have cas.e-suffixes, from stems

which are or are not otherwise in use.
1) The Accusative
i/am with the meaning of that, as,
tarn (tad)
kiin
idam
became
there, thither
why
*

'

'

'

here.'

Compounded with
then after

id

Noun and adjective

ndma by name
*

saccam

we have
*

analogy noce

false

in truth

*
;

if

cid=.ca-\-id: ce 'even,*

not

'

instead of

stems so used are

secretly

rattam

'

niccam

'

'

raho

always

ciram

and

tie.

at night

'

long

bhlyo

'

again.'
As accusatives of

nouns and adjectives we

sider several adverbs of obscure connection
like

must also conwhich go back

most of the preceding in their formation

to a period

anterior to Pali.
e.g.

'

speedily

sammd
2)

'

ittn/ii

silently

alam

'

enough

'

fully

ac^jju

instantly

The Instrumental

in

the evening

mitho and mithu

'
;

sdyam

'

isam

*
;

aram
*

'

mutually

little.'

Most of the pronominal adjective

and noun-stems noticed under

ace. occur in adverbial use

INDECLINABLES.

73

yena 'because, for which*; dakkhinena 'on the south';

'
*
*
diva by day ; amd * with.*
after a long time
'

cirena
3)

The Dative
*

'

hitdya

extensively used in an adverbial

*
*
for the
long time ; sukhdya

for the benefit.'

The Ablative

used adverbially,
durd, drd far off

is less

for a

cirdya

e.g.

benefit

4)

It

sense,

Most of the pronominal stems are

kasmd why ?
yasmd because
'

'

e.g.
'

'

'

'

under, below ; paccbd behind.'

The original of the ablative d is of necessity lost in Pali.
Its use is very limited,
kissa
e.g.
5) The Genitive
;

heithd

'

why
6)

'

cirassa

long

The Locative

on the earth

dre,

hetu

Forms

'
;

dure

and

heto

'

on account

adverbially used are,

of.'

e.g.

hhuvi

after.'

II. Prepositions.

Under the name

of upasagga (prepositions) the native

grammarians comprise a number of twenty words, which
modify the meaning of the verb or substantive to which

they are added.

Put

in alphabetical order they are as follows

^ati 'over, beyond.'

*

t adhi

above, over, superior

\anu 'after, under,

^apa 'away, from.'
'

near, close by.'

ajn

'

abhi

to, unto, against.'

aca 'away, down, oft.'
*
t d until, as far as.'
t*

ud
'

tj5rt

upwards, above.'
less.'

below,

du 'hardly.'
nir * downwards.'
ni {nir)

'

outward.'

pa 'forward, onward.'
"^pati or pati

pard

'

'

pari

'

to.'

less than.'

towards.'

away, aside, back.*

around, about.'

I*ALI

74
ri

apart, asunder.'
*

8am
8ti

To

GRAMMAR.

with, together.*

*well.*

must bo added a few others, which are

with
combined
verbs and nouns, but are of a more
equally
these words

limited use, such as

fanto antara 'within.*

t<f

'manifestly, close.'
*

tiro

across, beyond.'
*

pdtu manifestly.'
These are mainly used in composition with the verbs a,
hhuy kr.

and adverbs
and
marked
govern nouns. To
these must be added a few words, which are used like
modern prepositions and adverbs and only comparatively
seldom in combination with verbs and nouns, e.g.
All

of

the

above-mentioned

particles

f are used as prepositions,

adho

below.*

uddham ubbham

upwards.*

tiriyam 'across.*

pacchd 'behind.*
pararn 'beyond,
'

piird
bahi

'

after.*

before.'

outwards.'

rite 'except.*

vind
saha,

without.*

samam, saddhim

30.

'

with.*

COMPOUNDS.

Stems which admit of inflection are, as in other

languages, combined to form compounds, which are treated as
if simple in
respect to inflection and construction.
1)

COMPOUNDS.

75

2) As regards compounds, seldom more than two or three

stems are combined in the older language; but, as in
Sanskrit, the later the language is, the more compounds,

and cumbrous compounds

3) It

has formed

Piili

prevail.

of course difficult to determine which

is

and which

itself,

compounds

common with
criterion is, if we

has in

it

sort of
Indian languages.
words compounded according to rules which are no more
in abeyance in Pali ; but even that does not prove con-

other
find

clusively that a

compound belongs

as

commonwealth

to the

Indian languages.
e.g.

Skr. pumlinga

pumalingam.
4) These compounds
classes

I.

'

a good man ; pullihgam

in later Pali we find
for
which
manhood,'

sappuriso Skr. satpurusha

may

be divided into three principal

Copulative or Aggregative Compounds (dvandm).

The members

are coordinate; in uncom pounded condition

'
ca
and.'
Examples are very

they would be joined with

numerous.

The whole has the gender and

member, and is in number a plural,

declension of
e.g.

its

last

elaka-miga-sukara-

pakkhtno.

The compound, without regard

the gender of

The gender
:

e.g.

is

its

constituents,

number denoted

to the

becomes a singular

mostly neuter.

hiriottappam

ndmarupam
ddUddsa^i
ahoratto,

=
=
=

hiri

ndmam
ddsi

ahoratti,

+
+
+

ottappam

rupam
ddso

ahoraftam

dhammddhammo, but
dhammddhammd.

also

kusalakusalamy
plural

Puma
pum of
:

or

collective.

a male

'

puma and
we have itthipumam male and female ;

has two bases in composition

the former

as a

of the latter pumitthi 'masculine and feminine.'

Nouns, adjectives and particles are not

infrequently

PALI GRAMMAR.

76

repeated to give an intensive or distributive repetitional

meaning,

e.g.

gdmagdmam village after

day after day
anhamahnam mutually
punapunam again and

'

village

'

divase divase

'

again/
II.

Determinative Compounds

There are two divisions

(fappurisa).

Dependent compounds=the tappurisa proper, in which

the prior member is a substantive word standing to the other
in the relation of a case dependent on it.
2) Descriptive corQpo\md8=^kammadfidraj/a, in which the
prior member is an adjective, or another word having the
value of an adjective qualifying a noun.
1)

I.

can

They

of

Dependent Compounds.
be used

course

either

substantively or

The case relation may be of any kind.

hrahmaloko Brahma world
padodakam water

adjectivel3%

'

'

'

feet
'

accharasambhavo

truthful

nam

'

'

descent from a

dhammadharo

'

'

nymph

versed in the law

for the

saccavadi

'
;

sarandgama'

versed in the law ;

refuge ; veddgu
going
*
born blind ; apahbajitasadiso * like one who has
jaccandho
*
'
'
'
'
given up the world ; tadko like him ; mddiso like me ;
*

for

thdlipakko

cooked in a

pot.'

The order of the members which form such compounds

may be inversed addhamdso and mdsaddho half a month
*

'

a grandfather.*
sakhd
JRqjan,
(sak/ri), if employed as last members of a
all the forms known from the declension.
exhibit
compound,

pitdmaho

As

first

member

of a

compound

rq/an has the base rq/d

member

the nom. case as

the

last
rq/d
only form allowed in
Kosalarujd king of Kosala.'
rqjabhayam fear from a king
Sometimes stems not in use as simple words are employed
'

'

is

'

This looks as if a declined stem has

as first members.
been used; but the dependency is not always such as to
manasikdro
attention.'
favour such an explanation, e.g.
'

COMPOUNDS.

77

Descriptive Compounds {kammadharaya).

II.

of course sometimes difficult to say whether the comtappurusa or kammadharaya.

pound
mahanto 'great' takes in composition the weak forms mahd
It

is

is

and mahat,

santo

are

Examples

being, good, true,' the weak form sat.

'
*
blue lotus ; sahbaseto
nihippalam

all

white'; j9?"yflr;wraf^o 'speaking kindly'; rajassald 'amenstruous

woman*; sappuriso 'a good man'; saddhammo 'good doctrine';
mahapphalo
mahdpumo
very fruitful
great virtue
mahesi great sage
hetuppabhavo 'proceeding from a cause';
'

'

'

'

'

'

kacchurakhasd

The

scab.'

adverbial words which

commonly used

are

most
'

'

the negative particle ; sm ' well ; dus

'with.'
e.g.: asankhato 'the unconditioned';
'
'
from debt ; duppuro ' difficult to fill
sucinno

ana

'

with an army
ku as former part of

saseno

forms

the

takes

It

'

significant river

'

or,

an,

sa
badly
anano 'free
;

'

well done

'
;

ashamed.'

salajjo

and

frequently

members of compounds are

as prior

many compounds designates inferiority.

kad,

kicd,

kadannam

'

ku, e.g.

bad food

kunnadl

'
;

kuditthi

an in'

wrong

view/
Closely related

the

preceding class are III. the

The whole is made a neuter
{digu).

to

Numeral Compounds
singular.

sample of this sort of compound is digii, 'itself worth

'
'
further tidandam ' three staves ; ticlvaram
;

two cows
'

three robes

tlham

'

three days.*

IV. Adverbial Compounds (abyaylbhdm).

They

are also closely related to the Determinative com-

pounds.
They are formed in joining prepositions and
adverbs to a noun, and are then used as abstracts, collectives,

and simply adverbially

'

pleasure
'

'

as

if

'

according to one's
'
but yathdrucito as liked, pleasant
yathdmato
'
'
'
dead
sampahdro
aampq/amam
wounding
yathdnicim

consciousness

*
;

apacdro

approach.*

PALI GRAMMAR.

78

V. All the preceding compounds

may be

used adjectively,
*

free from
Bahuhbihi, e.g.
rltarago
'
a
man
from
free
but
puruso vltardgo
passion, an
passion ;
*
*
'
the
five
sorts
of
vision
but as an
arhat ; paTicacakkhu
;

and are then

called

*
epithet of the Buddha, pancacakkhit man possessing the five
'
*
*
but
sorts of vision ; anupubbam
regular succession
;

regular, successive*
destruction.*

anupubbo

anupubbo nirodho 'successive

In a few cases compounds are fotTned from words not

usually put together, e.g. of adverbs.
vitatho 'false, unreal '=n+^rt^Aa; yathdtatho 'real, true*:=
*
f/athd+tafhd. e.g. of a phrase itihdHO tradition*; itivuttam
:

'

name

of a book, a legend
*
conceit of Qw^evioriiy =.aham-\- aham.

or itivuttakam

'

ahamahamikam

All these compounds were formed before Pali became

a literary dialect.

HANDBOOK OF
II.

PALI.

CHRESTOMATHY.

THE PARITTAM, BEING EXTRACTS

FROM THE SUTTA PITAKAM.

NAMO TASSA :BHAGAyATO AEAHATO SAMMA

SAMBUDDHASSA.
Buddham saranam gaccliiTmi.
Dhammani saranam gacchami.
Saiigham saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchiimi.

Tatiyam
Tatiyam
Tatiyam

pi

Buddham saranam gacchami.

pi

Dhammam

pi

saranam gacchami.
Sangham saranam gacchami.

SARANAGAMAXAM.

veramani sikkhjipadam.
Adinnadana veramani sikkhiipadain.
Abrahmacariya veramani sikkhapadam.
Musavada veramani sikkhapadam.
veramani
Sura-meraya-majja-pamudatthana

1) Paniitipata

2)
3)
4)
5)

sikkha-

padam.
6) Vikalabhojana veramani sikkhapadam.

7) Nacca-glta-vadita-visukadassana veramani sikkhiipadam.

8) Mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhnsanattha-

na veramani sikkhapadam.
6

8AMANERAPANHA. DVATTIM8AKABA.

82

9) UccHsayana-mahiisayana veramanl sikkhapadam.

10) Jiitarupa-rajata-patiggahanii veramani sikkhapadam.

DASASIKKHAPADANI.

'

" Sabbe satta iiharatthitika."

" Namanca

'

Eka niima kirn ?

Dve niima kim ?
Tini nama kira ?

'

riipaiica."

Cattari niima kira ?

Pafica niima

Cha nama

'

kim

kira ?

'Satta niima

kim

" Tisso vedana."

'
" Cattari
ariyasaccani."
" Pane'
upiidiinakkhandhii."
" Cha

'

'

?
'

ajjhattikiini ayatanani.**

" Satta
bojjhahgii."

Attha nama kira ?

Nava niima kim ?

Dasa nama kim ?

"

'

"

Ariyo atthahgiko maggo."

Nava

sattiiviisii."

" Dasah'
angehi samannagato araMti

'

vuccati ti."

SAMANERAPANHAM.

Atthi imasmim kiiye

mamsam,

nahiiru,

kesa,

atthI,

lomii,

atthiminjii,

nakhii,

danta,

vakkam,

taco,

hadayam,

yakanara, kilomakam, pihakam, papphiisain, antam, antagunam, udariyam, karlsam, pittam, seraham, pubbo, lohitam,
sedo, raedo, assu,

vasii,

matthake matthaluhgan

khelo, einghiinikii, lasika, muttam,

ti.

DVATTIMSAKAEAM.

Patisankhii yoniso cTvarara patiseviimi yiivad eva sitassa

unhassa

patighiitiiya damsa-makasa-viit&tapasirimsapa-samphassiinara patighatiiya yavad eva hiri-kopina

patighiitiiya

paticchadanattham.

i|

1|

Patisankhii yoniso pindapiitara patiseviimi n'eva daviiya na

madaya na mandaniiya na
kayassa

thitiyii

nuggahaya

iti

vibhiisaniiya,

yiivadeva imassa

yiipanaya vihims(iparatiyii
puriinailca

brahmacariylL-

vedanam patisaiikhami navanca

DASADHAMMASUTTA

PACCAVEKKHANA.
vedanam na

uppadessJimi, yairU. ca

me

83

bhavissati anavajjata

ca phasuvihiiro c&ti. ||2||

Patisankhji yoniso senasanam patisevaml yiivadeva sitassa

patighataya unhassa patighiitiiya darasaraakasavatatapasirira-

sapasamphassanain patighataya yavadeva utuparissiiya vino-

danam patisallanaramattham.

||3||

Patisaukhji yoniso gilanapaccaya-bhesajjaparikkharam patisevatni

nam

yavadeva uppannanam veyyabadhikariara vedana-

patighataya abyapajjhaparamataysLti.

||4||

PACCAVEKKHANA.

Evam me sutam Ekaip

:

saraayaip

Bhagava Siivatthiyam

Tatra kho
Anathapindikassa arame.
'
*
bhikkhavo
ti 'bhadante' ti.
bhikkhu
amantesi
Bhagava
Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca
viharati

Jetavane

"Dasa

ime, bhikkhave,

dhamma

pabbajitena abhinham

pacca vekkh itabba.

Katame dasa ?
1)

Vevanuiyamhi ajjhupagato

ti

pabbajitena abhinham

pacca vekkhitabbam.
2) Parapatibaddha
vekkhitabbam.

me jivika ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca-

me akappo karaniyo ti pabbajitena abhinham

vekkhitabbam
pacca
4) Kacci nu kho me attasllato na upavadatiti pabbajitena
abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
5) Kacci nu kho mam anuvicca vinnil sabrahmacari sllato
na upavadantiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
6) Sabbehi me piyehi manapehi njinabhavo vinabhavo ti
pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
7) Kamraassa komhi kamma-dayado kamma-yoni kammabandhu kamma-patisarano, yam kamraam karissami kalyiinam
va papakarn va tassa day ado bhavissamiti pabbajitena abhin3) Aiino

ham
8)
tena

paccavekkhitabbam.
Eatham bhutassa me rattindiva vitipatantiti pabbaji-

abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.

MAHAMANGALASUTTA.

84
9) Kacci

nu kho 'ham sunnagiire abhiramiimiti pabbajU

tena abhinhara paccavekkhitubbara.

lOj Atthi nu kho rae uttariraanussadhammii alaraan'yananadassanaviseso adhigato so *hara pacchime kiile sabbrah-

manku

raacarl puttho na

bhavissiiiuiti pabbajitena

abhinham

paccavekkhitubbara.

Ime kho bhikkhave

dasa

dhammu

pabbajitena abhinham

ti.

paccavekkhitabba
Idam avoca Bhagavii

bhasitam abhinandun

attamanii te bhikkhu

Bhagavato

ti.

DASADHAMMASITTTA.

Evam me

sutani

viharati

Jetavane

afinatara

devata

Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam

Aniithapindikassa

abhikkantiiyii

arame.

rattiya

Atha

kho

abhikkantavanna

kevalakappam Jetavanam obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten'

Bhagavantam abhivadetvii
upasankamitva
upasankami
ekamantam atthasi. Ekaraantam ^hita kho sa devata Bhaga-

vantam gathaya ajjhabhasi

"

Bahu deva manussa ca mangalani acintayum

bruhi mahgalara
Akankharaana sotthanam
mam." 1

utta-

||

1|

Asevana ca balanam,
Puja ca pujanlyanam

panditiinafica sevana,
:

etam mangalam uttamara.'

||2||

Patirupa desaviiso ca pubbe ca katapunfiata

Atta sammapanidhi ca etam mangalam uttamam.'
:

Bahusaccafica sipparica vinayo ca susikkhito,

etam mangalain uttamam.'
yii vaca

Subhasita ca
*

||

||

1|

1|

Matapitu upatthiinara putta-diirassa sangaho

Anakula ca kammantii: etam mangalam uttamam.'

||5||

Diinanca dhammacariya ca fiatakiinanca sangaho

Anavajjani kammani: etam mangalam uttamam.*

Arati virati papa majjapiina ca saftftamo

Appamado ca dhammesu: etam mangalam uttamam.'

||6||

||7||

RATANASUTTA.
*

Garavo ca

niviito ca santutthi ca katafifiufa

Kiileua dliarama-savanam: etam mangaluni uttamam.*

*

KhantI ca sovacassata saraanananca dassanara

Kalena dhamma-sukacchu: etam mangalam uttamam.'

Tapo ca brahmacariya ca
Nibbana-sacchikiriya ca:

ari3'a8accana' dassanam
etam mangalam uttamam.'

||

8||

||9

1|

||10||

Phutthassa lokadharamehi cittara yassa na karapati

Asokam virajam khemam: etam mangalam uttamam.'

*

85

||

11

1|

Etadisani katviina sabbattha-m-aparajita

Sabbatha sotthim gacchanti: tesam mangalam utamam

12
ti.'
II

II

MAHAMANGALASUTTAM.

Yanidha bhutani samagatani

bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe
sabb' evabliiitii suraana bhavantu
atho pi sakkacca sunantu bhasitam.

||

Tasmahi bhuta nisiimetha sabbe

mettam karotha manusiya pajaya
diva ca ratto ca haranti ye balim

tasmahi ne rakkhattha appamatta.

Yam

kiiici

||2||

vittam idha va hurara va

saggesu va yain ratanam panltam

na no samam atthi Tathiigatena

buddhe ratanam panltam

idaTn pi

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||

1|

Khayam viriigam amatam panltam

Yad ajjhagii Sakyamuni samiihito
na tena dhammena sam' atthi kifici.
idam pi dhamme ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

11

11

1|

BATANASUTTA.

86

Yam

buddhasettho parivannuyi sucim

samudhim

anantarikail Aatn uhu

samadhinu tena samo na vijjati
idam pi dhamme ratanara panltam

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

Ye

||

1|

puggalu attha satam pasattha

yugani honti
dakkhineyya Sugatassa siivaka
etesu dinnjini mahapphalani.
idarn pi sanghe ratanam panltam
cattari etani

te

etena saccena suvatthi botu.

||

1|

Ye

suppayuttji manasii dalhena

nikkcTraino Gotama-siisanamhi
te pattipattii

amatam vigayha

laddhji raudha nibbutim bbunjamauii

idam

pi

sanghe ratanam panltam

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

Yath' indakhllo pathavira

||

1|

site siyii

catubbhi viitebhi asampakampiyo

tathApamara sappurisara vadami

yo ariyasaccani avecca passati

idam pi sanghe ratanaip panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||8

i|

Ye

ariya-saccani vibhavayanti
gam'bhlra-pannena sudesitani

kincapi te honti bhusapparaatta

na te bhavam atthamam jidiyanti

idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||

1|

Sahav* assa dassana-sampadiiya

tay* assu dhammii jahitii bhavanti
sakkilyaditthi vicikicchitanca

sThibbatam va pi yad atthi kifici

catuh' apayehi ca vippamutto

RATANASUTTA.

$7

cha cabhitthjlniini abhabbo katum

idam

pi saiighe ratanain panltam.

etena saccena suvatthi hotu. 10
||

|j

Kiiicapi so kararaam karoti pilpakam

kciyena vacii uda cetasii va

abhabbo so tassa paticchiidaya

abhabbata ditthapadassa vutto

idam

pi

sanghe ratanain panltam

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||

11

1|

Vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge

gimhana-mase pathamasmim gimhe
tathupamam dhammavaram adesayl
nibbanagarairn pararaam hitiiya
idam pi buddhe ratanain panitani
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. 12
||

Varo

varaiifiu

anuttaro

idam

pi

1|

varado varaharo

dhammavaram

adesayl

buddhe ratanam panltam

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||13||

Khinara puranam navam n'atthi sambhavam

virattacitta ayatike

bhavasmim

te khina-bija avirulhicchanda
nibbanti dhTra yathaj'am padlpo

idam

pi

sanghe ratanam panltam

14

etena saccena suvatthi hotu.

||

1|

Yiinidha bhutani samagatani

bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe

Tathiigatam deva-manussa-pujitam

Buddhara namassiiraa suvatthi hotu.

||

15

1|

Yanidha bhutani samagatani

bhummani va yani va

antalikkhe

Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitara
dhammam namassama suvatthi hotu.

l|16l|

KARANlYAMETTASUTTA.

88

Yitiiidha bhutani saroilgatuni

bhummJini

yuni va antalikkho
Tathiigatain de vumanussa-puj itam
vii

sangbam namassuma

suvattbi hotu. ||17|

RATANA8UTTAM.

Karanlyara attbakusalena

yan tain santara pad am abbisamecca

Sakko uju ca siiju ca
siivaco c'assa

mudu

anatimual.

||

1|

Santussako ca subbaro ca
appakicco ca sallabukavutti
santindriyo ca nipako ca

appagabbbo ca kulesu ananugiddbo.

Na

ca kbuddara samiicare

yena

kiilci

vinnii pare

sukbino

vii

upavadeyyum
kbemino bontu

sabbe satta bbavantu sukbitattu.

Ye

||2|

||4||

keci panabbut* attbi

anavasesii

tasii vii tbiivarii vii

digbii

vii

ye mabantii

majjbimii

rassakii

Dittbii

ye va

vii

vii

anuku

tbillii. ||4||

adittbii

ye ca diire vasanti avidiire

bbiltii vii

sabbe

sambbavesi

sattii

bbavantu

vii

sukkbitattii.

||

1|

Na

paro param nikubbetba

n&timafinetba kattbaci nam kinci
byarosanii patigba-sannii

n&tlfiamannasa
Miitii yatbii
iiyusii

dukkbam

iccbeyya.

niyam puttam
ekaputtam anurakkbe

||6||

KIIANDHAPARITTA.

89

evam pi sabbabhutesu
manasam bhiivaye aparimanam.

||

1|

Mettafica sabbalokasmira

manasam bhavaye aparimanam

uddham adho ca tiriyanca
asambiidhara averara asapattam.

||8||

Tittham carara nisinno va

sayiino va yavat' assa vigatamiddho
etam satim adhittheyya
brahmam etam viharam idha-m-ahu.
Dittbiiica
sllavii

||9||

anupagamma

dassanena sampanno

kamesu vineyya gedham

nahi jatu gabbhaseyyam punar

etiti.

||

10

1|

karanIyamettasuttam.

Evam me

sutam

Ekam samayam

Bhagavji Savatthiyam

Tena kho pana

vlharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa iiriime.
auiiataro
bhikkhu
ahina dattho
samayena Savatthiyam
kalankato

gava

hoti.

ten'

abhivadetvii
te

Atha kho sarabahula bhikkhu yena Bha-

upasaiikamirasu upasankamitvu Bhagavantara

ekamantam nisldimsu ekamantaiu nisinna kho

bhikkhu Bhagavantam etad avocum

Idha bhante, Savatthiyam aufiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho
:

kalankato

"Na

ti.'

ha

nuna

so,

bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani cattari

Sace hi so bhikkhave

ahiiajakuhTni mettena cittena phari.

bhikkhu

cattari ahirajakuhTni

hi so, bhikkhave,

Katamani
kulain,

mettena cittena phareyya

bhikkhu ahina dattho

cattari

Eriipatham

ahirajakuUmi ?
ahirajakulam

kiilara

kuliini

mettena cittena phari.

Chabyaputtara

Sace hi

so,

na

kareyya."

Virupakkham

kulam Kanhjigotaraakam ahirajakulam.

Na ha nuna so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani

ahiraja-

ahiraja-

cattari ahiraja-

bhikkhave, bhikkhu

METTASUTTA.

90

imitni cattilri ahiiajukulani mcttena cittena pharcyya,

bhikkhu ahinii dattho kiilam kareyya.

na hi

80 bhikkhave

Anujiinami, bhikkhave,
cittena

pharitum

inailni cattiiri

ahimjakulani mettena

attaguttiya attarakkbiiya attaparittayati.

Idam avoca Bhagava. Idam vatva Sugato athdparaai etad

avoca

satthii

me mettara, mettam Eriipathehi me

Chabyiiputtehi me mettam, mettam Kanhagotamakehi

Viriipakkhehi
ca.

mil

Apadakehi me mettara, mettam dvipiidakehi me

catuppadehi me mettam mettam bahuppadehi me.

||2||

Ma mam apudako himsi, ma mam himsi dvipadako

ma mam cattuppado himsi ma mam himsi bahuppado.
Sabbe

satta sabbe panii sabbe

sabbe bhadrani passantu,

ma

||

1|

bhuta ca kevala
kinci

papam agama

||4||

Appamiino buddho, appamjino dhammo, appamano sangho

pamanavantani sirimsapani ahivicchika satapadi unnana;

bhisarabu musika.

Kata me rakkhii, kata me paritta, patikkamantu bhQtani,

'ham namo Bhagavato namo sattannam sammasambuddhanam.
so

KHANDHAPARITTAM.

Evam me sutam

Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam

Tatra kho
viharati
Anathapindikassa ariirae.
Bhagava bhikkhii amantesi: "bhikkhave" ti, "bhadante" ti.
:

Jetavane

Te bhikkhii Bhagavato paccassosum.

Bhagava etad avoca

"Mettaya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya,

iisevitaya,

bhiivitaya,

yanikataya, vatthukataya, anutthitiiya paricitaya susamaraddhiiya ekadasdnisarasa patikankhii.

Katame ekadasa ?
bahullkatiiya,

2)

Sukham supati.
sukham patibujjhuti.

8)

na pitpakam supinam

1)

passati.

METTANISAMSAM.

91

4) manussanam piyo hoti.

6) amanussilnam piyo hoti.
6) devata rakkhanti.
7) nassa aggi va visara

vii

sattham va kamati.

8) tuvatam cittara saraadhlyati.

mukhavanno vippasldati.
10) asammulho kalara karoti.
9)

11) uttarim appativijjhanto brahmalokupago hot!

Mettaj'a,

bhikkhave,

cetovimuttiya

asevittiya

ti.

bhavitaya

baliullkata3'a yanikataya vatthukatiiya anutthitaya paricitaya

susamaraddhaya

ime ekadasanisarasa patikahkhii ti.

attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato

Idam avoca Bhagava

bhasitam abliinandunti.

METTASUTTAM.

Pahuta-bhakkho bbavati vippavuttho saka ghara

bahu nam upajlvaati yo mittanam na dubhati. 1
||

Yam yam janapadam

sabbattha

piijito hoti

yati nigiime rajadhaniyo

yo mittanam na dubhati.

Nissa cora pasahanti natimanfieti khattiyo

sabbe amitte tarati yo mittanam na dubhati.

||2|j

||3||

Akkuddho sagharam eti sabhaya patinandito

natlnam uttamo hoti yo mittanam na dubhati.

||4||

Sakkatva sakkato hoti garu hoti sagaravo

Tanna-kitti-bhato hoti yo mittanam na dubhati.

vandako pativandanara
yasokittinca pappoti yo mittanam na dubhati.

Pujako labhate

1|

||

1|

piijara

||6||

pajjalati devata va virocati

siriya ajahito hoti yo mittaaam na dubhati. ||7H

Aggi yatha

Gavo

tassa pajiiyanti khette vuttara viruhati

puttanam phalam asnati yo mittanam na dubhati.

||8||

MORAPARITTA.

92
Darlto pabbatiito

vil

rukkhiito patito naro

cuto patittham labhati yo inittiiuam na dubhati.

||9||

Virulharanlasantiinam nigrodham iva raiiluto

amitta nappasahanti yo raittiinam na dubhatiti.

||10||

METTANISAMSAM.

Udet* ayain cakkhumii

ekariijii

ha^rissa-vanno pathavippabhiiso,
tani tam namassarni harissavannam pat.havippabhiisam,
tay' ajja guttii

viharemu divasam.

||

1|

Ye briihraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae

te me namo te ca mam piilayantu,
Nam' atthu buddhilnam, nam' atthu
namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiyii

Imam

so parittam katvii,

moro

bodhiyii
!

||

||

carati esanu.

Apet* ayam cakkhuma ekaraja

harissavanno pathavippabhiiso,

tam tam namassarni harissavannam pathavippabhiisam

tay' ajja guttii

viharemu

rattirn.

||

3||

Ye brahraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae

te me namo te ca mam piiUiyantu,
Nam'
namo

Imam

atthu buddhiinam, nam' atthu bodhiyii!

vimuttiinara,

namo

so parittam katvii,

vimuttiyii

moro

\\4

|)

viisara akappayiti.

MORAPARITTA M.
Evam ne sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Siivatthiyara
Tena kho pana
viharati, Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime.
samayena Candiraii devaputto Riihuhii asurindena gahlto
hoti.

mano

Atha kho Candimii devaputto Bhagavantam anussaratiiyam vehlyara

imam

giithain abhiisi

CANDArARITTA.
*

Namo

03

Buddha-v!r* atthu

te

vippamutto

'si

sabbadhi

sambiidha-patipanno 'smi
tassa rae

saranam bhavati.'

||

1|

Atha kho Bhagavii Candimara devaputtam arabbha Eiihum

asurindam gathaya ajjhabbasi.
"

Tatbugatam arabantam
Candima saranam gato

Rabu
Candam pamuncassu
Buddbu lokanukampakati." ||2||
!

Atba kbo Rabu asurindo Candimam devaputtam muncitvii

yena Yepacitti asurindo ten' upasaukami
upasankamitva samviggo lomabattbajato ekamantam attbasi
ekamantara tbitara kbo Kabum asurindam Vepacitti asurindo
taramanarupo

giitbaya ajjbabbiisi
**

Kin nu santaramiino

Eahu

'va

Candam pamuncasi

samviggarupo agamraa
kin nu bbito 'va
*

Sattadba

me

tittbasitl."

pbale

||3||

muddba

jivanto na sukbam labbe.

Buddbagiitbabbiglto 'mbi

no ce munceyya Candiman

CANDAPARITTA

Evam me sutam

ti.

||4l|

..

Ekam samayam Bbagava

vibarati Jetavane Anatbapindikassa arame.

Siivattbiyain

Tena kbo pana

samayena Suriyo devaputto Rabunti asurindena gablto boti.

Atba kbo Suriyo devaputto Bbagavantam anussaramauo

tayam velayam imam gatbam abbasi

'

Narao

te

buddba
'si

vir*

atlbu

sabbadbi

vippamutto
sambadbapatipanno 'smi
tassa me saranam bbav&ti.'

II

II

SURIYAPARITTA.

94

Atha kho Bhagava Suriyam devaputtam iirabbha

asurindam guthiiya ajjhabhusi:

Rahum

"

Tathiigatam arahantam
Suriyo saranam gato

Rahu Suriyam pamuncassu

Buddha lokinukampakati." ||2||
!

"

Yo andhakiire tamasi pabharikaro

verocano mandall uggatejo
ma Riihu gill caram antalikkbe
pajam

mama Rahu

pamufica Suriyan

ti."

||3||

Atha kho Riihu asurindo Suriyam devaputtam

*

Sattadhii

me

phale

pe

muddha

jivanto na sukham labhe

Buddhagiithabhigito 'mhi

no ce muficeyya Suriyan

ti.' ||4||

SURIYAPARITTAM.

Evam me

bhikkhu

avoca
"

||

Ekam eamayam Bhagava

Siivatthiyam

Tatra kho
"bhadante" ti.

ariime.

Aniithapindikassa
bhikkhii jiraantesi "bhikkhavo"

Bhagava
te

sutam.

Jetavane

viharati

Bhagavato

paccassosum.

ti,

Bhagava

etad

II

Bhutapubbam,
ahosi.

bhikkhave,

samu-

devasura-sangiirao

devanam

Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sakko

pabbniho
indo deve Tiivatimse iimantesi
"
Sace, mjiristi, deviinam sangamagatanam uppajjeyya bhayam vji chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii mam eva tasmim
:

samaye dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Mamara hi vo dhajaggam

uUokayatam yam bhavissati bhayam vii chambhitattam va
lomahamso vii so pahlyassati. ||2||
No ce me dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha, atha kho Pajiipatissa

dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Pajiipatissa hi fo devayam bhavissati bhayam

ullokayatara
riijassa dhajaggam
3
vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyissati.
devariljassa

||

1|

DHAJAOGA PARITTA.

95

No

ce Pujjipatissa devariijassa dhajaggain uUokeyyutha,

Varunassa
dhajaggam uUokeyyutha.
devariijassa
Varuuassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam
bhavissati bhayara vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so

atha

pahlyissati. ||4||
No ce Varunassa

dhajaggam ullokeyyiitha,
Isadhajaggam ullokeyyiitha.
nassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam bhavissati
bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so
atha Isiiuassa

devariijassa

devarajassa

||5||

pahlyissati.

Tam kho

pana bhikkhave Sakkassa

devanam indassa

vii

dhajaggam uUokayatam Pajiipatissa vii deviinara riijassa

dhajaggam uUokayatam Varunassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam
Isiiuassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam uUokauUokayatam
yatam yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyetha pi no pahlyetha. 6
:

II

Tam

1|

kissa hetu ?

"Sakko, bhikkhave, deviinam indo avitariigo avitadoso

avitamoho bhirucchambhi uttriisi phaliiyiti." 7
" Sace
Ahafica kho bhikkhave evam vadami
tumhakam,
bhikkhave, arauiiagatiinam va rukkhamulagatanam vii suuna[|

jj

giiragatiinam

lomahamso

vii

vii

uppajjeyya bhayam vii chambhitattam

eva tasmim samaye anussareyyiitha

mam

Bhagava araham samma-sambuddho

Iti pi so

vii

vijja-carana-

sampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro purisadamma-sarathi

sattha devamanussanam buddho Bhagavii ti. ||8||

Mamam
bhayam

vii

hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati

chambhitattam va lomahamso pahlyissati.

No ce mam anussareyyiitha atha dhammani anussareyyatha

Sviikkhiito Bhagavatii

dhammo sanditthiko akiiliko

ehipassiko
Dhammam hi vo

opanayiko paccattam veditabbo vinnuhiti.

bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bha3'am va chambhitattam

No

vii

ce

lomahamso va

dhammam

so pahlyissati.

||9||

anussareyyiitha atha sangham anussa-

Supatipanno Bhagavato savakasangho, ujupatipanno Bhagavato siivakasahgho, uiiyapatipanno Bhagavato

siivakasahgho, siimlcipatipanno Bhagavato siivakasangho
yadidam cattiiri purisayugiiui attha purisapuggalii esa sava-

reyyiitha.

DHAJAGGA TARITTA.

96

kasangho iihuneyyo pjihuneyyo dakkhineyyo anjalikaranlyo

anuttaram punna-khettam lokass&ti.
Sangham hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati
bhayani vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso va so pahl:

yissati. ||10||

Tarn kissa hetu

bhikkhave, araham samraasambuddho

vltamoho abhlru acchatnbhi anutrasi

hi,
TathcTgato
vltariigo vitadoso

ophahlyiti. ||11||

Idam avoca Bhagavii idam vatvana Sugato athiparam

etad avoca sattha

"Aranfie rukkha

miilevii sunfiagarevji

bhikkhavo

anussaretha sambuddham bhayaiu tumhiikam no

"

No

ce

atha
*'

Buddham

dhammam

si^'ii."

||

No ce Dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam

atha sangham sareyyatha punfiakkhettam anuttaram." 3

Evam

1|

sareyyatha lokajettham narasabhara

sareyyatha niyyanikain sudesitam." i|2||

j|

"

dhammam

Buddham sarantanam

bhikkhavo
bhayatn va chambhitattam

vii

1|

sanghanca

lomahamso na

hessa-

titi>||4ii

DHAJAGGA PARITTAM.

Evam me sutam

Ekam samayam

Bhagavii Riijagahe

Tena kho pana samaMahiikassapo

pipphaliguhayam viharati,
yena ayasma
abadhiko dukkhito balhagihlno. Atha kho Bhagavii silyanviharati Veluvane Kalandakaniviipe.

hasaraayam patisaUiinii vutthito, yen' iiyasmii Mahiikassapo

ten'
upasahkami upasahkamitva pailuatte iisane nisTdi.
Nisajja kho Bhagavii iiyasmantam Makiikassapam etad
avoca
" Kacci te
Kassapa khamanlyam, kacci yapanlyam, kacci
Patikkamo
dukkhiivedanii patikkamanti no abhikkamanti.
:

'fiiinam pariniiya ti

no abhikkamo

"

ti.

MAnAKASSArABOJJHANGA.

97

*Na me, bhante, khamanlyam na yapanlyam balhii me

dukkhitvedanii abhikkamanti no patikkamanti. Abhikkamo
no patikkarao ti.
" Satt'
ime, Kassapa, boj jhangii may:! saramJid-akkhJitiT bhiivitii bahullkata
abhinnjiya sambodhaya nibbaniiya samvattanti.
'siinam pafinayati

1) Satisambojjharigo kho,

bhjlvito

baliullkato

maya saramad-akkhato

Kassapa,

abhinnaya

sambodhaya

nibbiinaya

samvattati.
2)

Dhammavicayasambojjhango

pe

nibbiinaya sam-

vattati.

pe

3) Viriyasambojjharigo

pe

4) Pitisarabojjhango
5)

Passaddhisambojjhango

6)

Samiidhisambojjhango

nibbaniiya samvattati.
nibbiiniiya samvattati.
nibbiiniiya samvattati.

pe
pe

nibbiiniiya samvattati.

7) TJpekhasambojjharigo
nibbiiniiya samvattati.
pe
Ime kho Kassapa satta boj jhangii maya sammiidakkhiita

bhavita bahulikata abhiiiuaya sambodhiiya nibbiiniiya samvattanti ti.

*

Taggha, Bhagava, bojjhangii, taggha, Sugata, bojjhariga

ti.'

Idam avoca Bhagavii

attamano

iiyasmii

Mahiikassapo

Bhagavato bhiisitam abhinandi.

Yutthahi cayasmii Mahiikassapo tamhii iibiidha tatha pablno
c&yasmato Mahiikassapassa so abiidho ahositi.

MAHAKASSAPATTHERABOJJHANGAM.

The Mahdmoggalldnaithera hojjhahgam and the Mahdeundatthera hojjhahgam agree with the preceding sutta in all
but the name.

Evam me sutam

Ekara samayam Bhagava Siivatthiyam

Tena kho pana
samayena iiyasmii Girimiinando iibiidhiko hoti dukkhito
Atha kho iiyasmii Anando yena Bhagavii ten*
biilhagihlno.
:

viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime.

upasamkami upasamkamitvii Bhagavantam abhiviidetvti

ekamantam nisldi ekamantam nisinno kho iiyasma Anando

Bhagavantam etad avoca

GIRIMANANDASUTTA.

98

Ayasma, bhante, Girimjinando abjidhiko dukkhito bajhagiSjidhu bhante Bhagava

yen* ayasma Girimanando
ten' upasaiikaraatu anukamparn upjiday&ti.
tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno
Sace kho
Thiinara kho
sanfia
bhaseyyasi.
upasankamitvii dasa
Girimiinandassa
bhikkbuno
dasa
etam
vijjati
yam
pan'
lano.

sanna

sutvii so abildho thiiaaso

Katame dasa
"

patippassambheyya.

sannii ?

Aniccasafina,

anattasanna,

adinavasanna,

asubhasannii,

pahanasanila, viragasannii, nirodhasanfiii, sabbaloke anabhirati sanna, sabbasahkhiiresu aniccasanna, anapanasati."

Katama ca Ananda aniccasaiii'ia ?

" Idh' Ananda
bhikkhu, arafinagato va rukkhamulagato
va sunnagjiragato

vii iti

patisancikkhati
aniccara, vedanii anicca, sanna anicca, sahkharii
:

Rfipam
vinnanam aniccan
nakkhandhesu aniccanupassi
anicca,

aniccasanna.

||

Iti

imesu

viharati.

Ayam

ti.

anatta,

rupam

anatta, sotara anatta, jivha anatta,

rasa anatta, kayo anatta, photthabba anatta,

dhamraii anattii ti.
Iti

Ananda

1|

Katama ca Ananda anattasanna ?

Idh' Ananda
pe
patisancikkhati

Cakkhum

paiicas' upiida-

vuccat'

mano

anatta,

ime cbasu ajjhattika-bahiresu iiyatanesu anattanupassi

viharati.

Ayam

vuccat'

Ananda

anattasanna.

||2||

Katama ca Ananda asubhasannji? Idh* Ananda bhikkhu

imam eva kiiyam uddham pjidatalii, adho kesamatthakii tacapariyantam puram nanappakiirassa asucino paccavekkhati.
Atthi imasmim kjlye kesa
pe
matthalungan ti. (See
:

page 82).
Iti imasmim kaye asubh&nupassl
Ananda asubhasanna. 3
i|

Katama

ca

Ananda

patisancikkhati.

viharati.

Ayam

vuccat*

1|

adlnavasafiria ?

Idh'

Ananda

pe

GIRIMANANDASUTTA.

Bahu dukkho kho ayam

99

bahu udlnavo

kiiyo,

kaje vividha iibadhji uppajjanti seyyathidain

iti

imasmim

Cakkhurogo, sotarogo, ghiinarogo, jivhiirogo, kiiyarogo,

kannarogo, mukharogo, dantarogo, kuso, siiso,
piniiso, daho, jaro, kucchirogo, mucchu, pakkhandika, sulo,
sisarogo,

kuttham, gando, kiliiso, soso, apam;iro, daddu,

kandu, kacchura-khasii, vitacchika, lohitara, pittam, madhu-

visQcikii,

meho, amsa, pilaka, bhagandala, pitta-samutthana-abadha,

semha-samutthana-abadha, vata-samutthana-abadha, sannipatikii-abadhii, utu-viparinamaja-abadha, visama-pariharajii-

abiidha, opaka-abadha, kammavipilka-abadha, sitam,

unbam,

jigbaccha, pipasa, uccaro, passiivo.

imasmim

kiiye adinavanupassi vibarati.

4
adlaavasauua.
Ananda,
Iti

||

Katama

ca

Ayam

vuccat'

1|

Ananda pabanasanna ? Idb' Ananda bbikkbu

uppannam kama-vitakkam nadbivaseti

byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.

Uppannam byapildavitakkam

viuodeti

pajabati,

nadbivaseti pajabati vinodeti

byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.

Uppannam vihimsavitakkam

nadbivaseti pajabati vino-

anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam uppanne papake akusale dbamme nidbiviiseti
pajabati vinodeti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
deti byantikaroti

Ayam

vuccat*

Ananda

pabanasaniia.

||5||

Katama c' Ananda viragasanua ?

Idb' Ananda bbikku
pe
patisancikkbati.
Etam. santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbarasamatbo sabbClpadbi patinissago tanbakkbayo virago nibba-

^an tL

Ayam

vuccat*

Ananda

viragasanna.

||6||

Katama ca Ananda nirodbasanna ?

Idb* Ananda bbikkbu
pe
patisancikkbati
Etam santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbiirasamatbo
:

8abb(^padbi patinissaggo tanbakkbayo nirodbo nibbanan

Ayam vuccat' Ananda nirodbasanila. 7
|j

1|

ti.

GIRIMANANDASUTTA.

100

Ananda sabbaloke anabhiratisafinii ?

Ananda bhikkhu ye loke upayupiidana

Katamii
Idh*

c'

cetaso

adhitthan&bhinivesdnusayil te pajahanto viramati na upadisauna, 8

yanto. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabba loke anabhirati
1|

1|

Katama c' Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasafifia ?

Idh' Ananda bhikkhu sabbasankharesu atthiyati harayati
jigucchati.
Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasauua.

II

II

Ananda anjipiinasati ?
Idh' Ananda bhikkhu arafinagato vu rukkhamiilagato va
sunnagiiragato \a. nlsldati pallankam abhujitva ujum kayam
Katatnii

panidhaya

c'

pariraukkham

satim

upatthapetva so sate va

assasati sate passasati:

Digham va assasanto digham assasamiti pajiiniiti.

Digham vji passanto digham passasiimiti pajanati.
Rassam va assasanto rassam assasamiti pajanati.
Rassam va passasanto

rassain passasiimiti pajanati.

Sabbakayam patisamvedl
Sabbakayam patisamvedl

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

passasissainiti sikkhati.

Passambhayam kayasankharam
Passambhayam kayasankharam

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

passasissamiti sikkhati.

Piti-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Piti-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Sukha- patisamvedl

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Sukha-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Citta-sahkhiira-patisamvedi assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Gitta-sahkhiira-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Passambhayam cittasahkhiiram
Passambhayam cittasankhiiram

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Citta-patisaravedl assasissamiti sikkhati.

Oitta-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Abhippamodayam cittam
Abhippamodayam cittam

assasissiimiti sikkhati.

passasissiimiti sikkhati.

ATANATIYASUTTA.

101

Samjidayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Saniadayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.

Vimocayam

cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati.

Viraocayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.

AniccanupassT assasissiimiti sikkhati.

AniccanupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.

ViriiganupassI assasissiimiti sikkhati.
ViriiganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Nirodhanupassi assasissiimiti sikkhati.

NirodhanupassI passasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassT assasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.

Ayam

vuccat'

Ananda

Sace kho tvam

dasa

aniipiiniisati. ||10|j

Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkhum

imii

sutva so abadho thanaso patippassambheyyati.

kho ayasma Anando Bhagavato santike imii dasa

saiiuii

Atha

yen' ayasmii Girimanando ten' upasankami

upasankamitvii ayasmato Girimanandassa ima dasa sauna
sarina uggahetvii

abhiisi.

Atha kho iiyasmato Girimiinadassa

imii dasa sanfiii sutva

so abiidho thanaso patippassambhi.

Vutthahi

cayasraii

Girimanando

tamhii

iibiidhii

tatha

pahino ca panayasmato Girimanandassa so iibiidho ahositi.

GIRIMANANDASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me sutam
viharati Gijjhakiite

Ekam samayam
pabbate.

Bhagavii Riijagahe

Atha kho

cattiiro mahiiriijii

mahatiyii ca Yakkha-seniiya mahatiyii ca Gandhabba-seniiya

mahatiya ca Kumbhanda-seniiya mahatiyii ca Niiga-seniiya

catuddisam rakkham thapetvii catuddisam gumbarn thapetvii

catuddisam avaranam thapetvii abhikkantiiya rattiyii abhik-

ATANATIYASUTTA.

102

kautavannii kevalakappam

Gijjhakutam obhasetva
yena
upasankamimsu upasankamitva Bhagavantam
abhiviidetvii ekamantam nisldimsu.
1
Te pi kho Yakkha app' ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetva
ekamantam nisldimsu app' ekacce yena Bhagavata saddhim
sammodimsu saramodanlyara katham saranlyam vltisaretva
ekamantam nisldimsu; app' ekacce yena Bhagava ten' anjalim
panametva ekamantam nisldimsu app' ekacce niima gottam
savetva ekamantam nisldimsu app' ekacce tunhlbhuta eka-

Bhagava

ten'

fj

1|

mantam nisldimsu. ||2||

Ekamantam nisinno kho Vessavanno maharaja Bhagavantam etad avoca
Santi

hi,

santi hi, bhante,

hi,

bhante, ujarji Yakkhji Bhagavato appasanna:

Yakkha Bhagavato pasannii santi

Yakkha appasanna santi hi, bhante,

uliinT

bhante, majjhima

majjhima Yakkha pasanna:

Bhagavato appasanna: santi
gavato pasanna.

santi hi, bhante, nica Yakkhji

bhante, nIca

hi,

Yakkha Bha-

||3||

Yebhuyyena kho pana bhante Yakkha appasanna yeva

Bhagavato tam kissa hetu ?
"Bhagava hi, bhante, piinatipata veramaniya dhamraam
deseti
adinntidana veramaniya dhammam deseti
kamesu
micchacara veramaniya dhammam deseti
musavada veramaniya dhamraam deseti
suramerayamajja-pamadatthanii
;

veramaniya

dhammam

deseti."

||

1|

"Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, Yakkha appativirata yeva

adinnudanii, appativirata kamesu
panatipiitii, appativirata
micchaciira,

appativirata

musavjidii,

appativirata

sura-

merayamajjapamadatthana, tesam tam hoti appiyam amanapam."||5||^

"Santi hi bhante Bhagavato savakii arafiue vanapanthani
panthani

seniisanjini patisevanti

appasaddani appanigghosani

vijanavatani manussa-rahaseyyakani patisallana-siiruppani

Tattha santi uliira Yakkha niviisino, ye imasmim Bhagavato
:

pavacane appasanna. Tesam pasiidaya ugganhjitu, bhante,

Bhagava Atanatiyam rakkham bhikkhunarn, bhikkhunlnam,

upasakanam

upjisikanam guttiyii rakkhjiya avihirasaya

Adhivasesi Bhagava tunhlbhavena. Atha

phasuviharay^ti."

ATANATIYASUTTA.

kho Yessavano
tayam veliiyam

Bhagavato adhiviisanara viditva

raahjirajii

imam

103

Atiinatiyam rakkham abhasi

Yipassissa nam' atthu cakkhumantassa sirlmato !

Sikkhissa pi nam' atthu sabba-bhutanukampino

||6||

||1||

Yessabhussa nam' atthu nahjitakassa tapassino

Nam' atthu Kakusandhassa Milra-sena-pamaddino
!

||2||

Koniigamanassa nam* atthu brahmanassa vuslmato

3
Kassapassa nam' atthu vippamuttassa sabbadhe

Anglrasassa nam' atthu Sakyaputtassa sirlmato

||

1|

Yo imam dhammam adesesi sabba-dukkha pan udunam!

Ye

||4||

capi nibbuta loke yathabhutara vipassisum

Te jana apisuna ca mahanta vitasarada

Hitam devamanussanam yam naraassanti Gotamam
Yijjiicarana-sampannam mahantam vltasaradam. i|5||
Yato uggacchati suriyo adicco mandali mahai,
Yassa c'uggacchamanassa samvarl pi nirujjhati,
Yassa c'uggate suriye divaso ti pavuccati. ||6||

Rahado

pi tattha

Evara tarn tattha

gambhiro samuddo saritodako

jiinanti samuddo saritodako

Ito sa purimii disa

Yam

nam

iti

acikkhati jano.

||7||

disara abhipaleti mahjiraja yassasi so

Gandhabbiinam

adhipiiti

Dhatarattho

namaso

iti

E-amati naccagltehi Gandhabbehi purakkhato.

Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam

Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. 9
pi

1|

Buddham

Durato va

Namo

1|

||

Te ca

||

disviina Buddham iidiccabandhunara

naraassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||10||

te puris&janfia

namo

te puris'

uttama

Kusalena samekkhesi amanussil pi tam vandanti

Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasma evara vademase.

Jinam vandatha Gotamam

jinara vandjima

II

1111

Gotamam,

Yijjacaranasampannara Buddham vandiima Gotamam!

Yena Pefa pavuccanti pisunii pitthiraamsika
Fanatipiitino ludda cora nekatika jana.

II

13

1|

||12j|

AT4NATIYASUTTA.

104'
Ito

sii

Yam

dukkhinJI

disam

disa. iti

nam

iicikkhati jano

abhipilleti inaliiiraja yasasslso

KurabhandJinam adhipati Virulho iti niima so

Ramati naccagltehi Kurabhandehi pur' akkhuto.
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutain
Asltim dasa eko ca Indanamit mahabbala 15
||

II

14

1|

|j

Te ca pi Buddhara disvana Buddhara iidicca baiidhunam

Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||16||

Namo te purisajanna namo te puris' uttama

Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti
Sutain n' etam abhinhaso tasma evam vandemase.
!

17

||

1|

Jinam vandatha Gotamam, jinam vandama Gotamam,

18
Vijjiicaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam
!

Yatha
Yassa

c'

II

maha

uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall

uggaccbamanassa divaso pi nirujjhati

Yassa coggate suriye samvariti pavuccati
c'

Kahado

Evam

pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako

tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako. 19
||

Ito sa pacchimji

Yam

disam

1|

nam

iicikkhati jano
abhipiileti mahjinlja yasassi so
disii iti

Nagiinam ca adhipati Viriipakkho iti niimaso

Kamati naccagltehi Nagehi pur^kkhato. \\20\\
Puttii pi tassa

bahavo eka nama

ti

me sutam

Asltim dasa eko ca Indauilma mahabbala.

I|21||

c&pi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunam

Diirato va namassanti mahantam vitasilradam. 22

Te

||

Namo

te purisajanna,

namo

te puris*

1|

uttama

Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti

Sutam n'etam abhinhaso

tasmii

evam vandemase

II23II

jinam vandiima Gotamam

Buddham
vandiima Gotamam
Vijjiicaranasampannam
Yena Uttara-kururammii Mahilmeril Sudassano

Jinam vandatha Gotamam

Manussii tattha jiiyanti amamii apariggahii.

||24||

ATANATIYASUTTA.
IsTa te

bljarn pavapanti

Akattha-pakimam

105

na pi nlyanti nangala

siilim

paribhunjanti manussa.

I|25||

Akanam athusam suddham sugandham tandulapphalam

Tundlklre pacitvana tato bhunjanti bhojanam.

I|26||

Gavim ekakhuram katvii anuyanti diso disam

Pasum ekakhuram katva anuyanti diso disam
Itthi va vahanam katva anuyanti diso disam
Purisavahanam katva anuyanti diso disam

Kumarlvahanam katva anuyanti disa disam

Kumaravahanam katva anuyanti diso disam.

II

27

II

Te yane abhiruhitva sabbadisa anupariyanti pacara

tassa

rajino

Hatthi-yiinam assa-ytinam dibba-yanam upattbitam

Pasada sivika c' eva maharajassa yassasi so
Tassa ca nagarH ahu antalikkhe sumapita
Atanata Kusinata Parakusinata Natapuriya ParakusitaniitS.

II

28

II

Uttarena Kuplvanto Janogbam aparena ca

Navanavatiyo
rajadhanl.

Ambara-ambaravatiyo Alakamanda nama

||29|i

Kuverassa kho pana, marisa, mabarajassa Yisana nama

rajadhanl

Tasma Kuvero maharaja Yessavano

ti

pavuccati.

|j30||

Paccessanto pakasenti Tatola Tattala Tatotala

Ojasi Tejasi Tatojasi Saroriija Arittho Nemi

Rahado

pi tattha DharanI niima yato megha pavassanti

Vassa yato patayanti sabbapi tattha Bhagalavati nama
Yattha Yakkha payirupasanti. ||31
1|

Tattha niccaphahT rukkha namii dijaganayuta

Mayura-koucabhi ruda-kokiladlhi vaggubhi
Jivara-jlvaka sadd' ettha, atho otthava-cittaka

Kukutthaka

kullrakii

vane pokkharasataka.

||

32

1|

Sukasalika-sadd' ettha, dandamanavakiini ca

Sobhati sabbakalam sa Kuvera-nalini sada. 113311

ATANATIYASUTTA.

106
Ito sa uttam disa

Yam

iti

nam

acikkhati jano,

disam abhipaleti mahiiraja yasassi so

Yakkhiinam adhipati Kuvero iti niimaso

Kamati nacca-gltehi Yakkhehi pur' akkhato.

1134

II

Putta pi tassa bahavo eka niima ti me sutam

Asltim dasa eko ca Inda nama mahabbula. ||35||

Te

capi

Buddham

Buddham

disvana

ildicca

bandhunam

Durato va namassanti mahantam vitasaradam.

Namo

te puris' ajafiua,

namo

te puris'

||36||

uttama

Kusalena saraekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti

Sutam n* etam abhinhaso tasma evam yandemase
:

||

37

Jinam vandatba Gotamam Jinam vandama Gotamam

Vijjacarana-sampannam Buddhain vandama Gotamam!
!

Ayaln klio sii, marisa, Atanatiya rakkha, bhikkhunam

bhikkhunlnam upasakanam upasikanam guttiya, rakkhaya,
avihirasaya, phiisu viharjiya

ti.

II

II

bhikkhussa va bhikkhuniya va
Tipjisakassa va upasikiiya v&
ayam Atanatiya rakkha suggabita bhavissati samatta pariyaputii tance amanusso Yakkho va

Yassa

kassaci,

marisa,

Yakkhinl va Yakkhapotako va Yakkhapotika va Yakkhamahamatto va Yakkhaparisajjo va Yakkhapacaro va 8

9
Gandhabbo va GandhabbI vil
pe
Kumbhando va Kumbhandl va
IIIOU
pe
11
vii
va
Nago
pe
Naglnl
gacchantam va anugaccheyya thitam va
paduttheicitto
va upanisldeyya, nipannam va
upatittheyya, nisinnam
II

II

II

upanipajjeyya.

Nam

II

12

II

II

II

II

amanusso labheyya giimesu va nigamesu

va sakkarara va garukaram va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Alakamandaya rajadhaniya vatthum va vasam va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Yakkhanam samitim
eso, marisa,

gantum.

II

1311

nam, marisa, amanussa anavayham pi nam

Api
kareyyum avivayham. Api ssu nam, marisa^ amanussa attahi
88U

ATANATiyASUTTA.

107

pi paripunnahi paribhasiihi paribhaseyyura.

amanussa

miirisa,

Api

rittum

pattam

pi

sise

Api

ssu

nam,

nikkujjeyyum

nam, marisa, amanussa sattadha pi assa muddham

ssu

phiileyyum. ||14||
Santi hi, marisa, amanussa, candii, rudda, rabhasa, te n' eva

maharajanara adiyanti na maharajanam purisakanam adiyanti na maharajanam purisakanarn purisakanam adiyanti.

Te kho te, marisa, amanussa maharajanam avaruddha nama
;

vuccanti, seyyathiipi marisa, ||15||

"raiino Magadhassa vijite cora te n' eva ranno

Magadhassa
Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti na
raiino Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa,
mahacora pi ranno Magadhassa avaruddha nama vuccanti.
Evam eva kho, marisa, santi hi amanussa canda, rudda,
rabhasa te n' eva maharajanam adiyanti na maharajanam,
purisakanam adiyanti, na maharajanam purisakanam adiTe kho 'te, marisa, amanussa avaruddha nama
yanti.
:

adiyanti

na

railiio

vuccanti.

Yo

hi

||16||

koci, marisa,

amanusso Takkho va TakkhinI

pe-||17||

Gandhabbo va Gandhabbi
Kumbhando va Kumbhandl

Nago va Naglnl va
padutthacitto

pe

pe

||

||

18

pe
20

1|

||19||

1|

bhikkhum va bhikkhunim va upasakam va

upasikanam va gacchantam va anugaccheyya, thitam va

upatittheyj'a, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va upanipajjeyya, imesam Yakkhanam Mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam
mahasenapatlnam upajjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbam: ||21||

Ayam Yakkho
Yakkho
vihimsati,

ayam Yakkho avisati, ayam

Yakkho
himsati, ayam Yakkho
ayam
Yakkho
na
22
muficatiti.
ayam
ganhati,

hetheti,

||

1|

Katamesara Yakkhanam Mahayakkhanam sena-patinam,

maha-seua-patlnam

Indo Somo Varuno ca Bharadvajo

Pajjipati

Cando Karaascttho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca

Panado Opamauuo ca Devasuto ca Matali

ATAXATIYASUTTA.

108

Oandhabbo Nalarujii Janesabho

Ilemavato Punnako Karatiyo Gulo
Sivako Mucalindo ca Vessaraitto Yugandharo
Cittaseno ca

Siitsigiro

Gopjilo

Suppagedho ca

Ilirl

NettI ca Mandiyo

Pancalacando Alavako Pajjuno Sumano Sumukho

Dadhimukho Mani
saha.

II

23

Miiaicaro

Digho Atho Serissako

II

Imesam YakkhJinam mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam

mahii-

senapatlnam ujjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbara

na rauncatiti. ||24||
Ayam Yakkho ganhiiti pe
kho
sii,
marisa, AtiinJitiyii rakkhii bhikkhunara
Ayam
bhikkhunlnain upasakanam upasikiinara guttiya rakkhaya
avihimstiya phiisuviharayjiti.

Handa ca'

diini

bahukaranlyati.

Yassa

diini

Atha kho
abhivadetva
yimsu.

Te

II

25

II

marisa gaccbiima bahukicca

mayam

mayam

||26||

tumhe maharjijjino killara maririathElti. II27II

cattaro mahiirajaao utthayslsana, Bhagavantam
katva

padakkhinam

tatth'

ev'

antaradha-

I|28||

pi

kho Yakkha

utthjiyasanji

app ekacce Bhagavantam

abhivadetva padakkhinam katvii tatth' ev' antaradhayiinsu.

App* ekacce Bhagavata saddhira sammodimsu sammodani-

yam katham

sariinlyara vltisiiretvii tath ev' antaradhayiinsu.

ekacce
App'
yena Bhagava, ten' aftjalim panametvii tatth'

ev' antaradhiiyimsu.

App' ekacce nilma gottain

App' ekacce tunhlbhOta
"

siivetvii tatth* ev'

antaradhayiinsu.

tatth' ev' antaradhayimsQti. 1129

j|

rakkham PariyaDharetha, bhipunatha, bhikkhave Atiinatiyam rakkham

TJgganhJItha, bhikkhave, AtanJitiyam

kkhave, Atanatiyam rakkhain ! Atthasamhitiiya, bhikkhave,

Atanatiya rakkha bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnain upasakanam
upasikiinam guttiya rakkhaya avihimsaya phasu vilijirjiyati.
Idam avoca Bhagava attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
:

bhasitam abhinandun

ti.

II

30

II

ATANATIYASUTTAM.

DHAMMACAKKA.

109

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me sutam

Ekam

saraayara Bhagavii Baranasiyam

Tatra kho Bhagava panca-

viharati

Isipatane Migadaye.
vaggiye bhikkhu iimantese: 1
||

"Dve

'me,

1|

bhikkhave, anta

pabbajitena na

sevitabbiii.

Katarae dve?

*Yo c^yam kjimesu kiimasukhallikanuyogo hino gammo

pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasamhito yocayam atta-kilama;

th&nuyogodukkhoanariyoanatthasamhito;

etekhobhikkhave

ubho ante anupagamma majjhima

patipadii Tathagatena
abhisarabuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-

fiuiiya

sambodhaya nibbanaya

samvattati.'

||2

1|

Katamii ca sa bhikkhave majjhima patipada Tathagatena

abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-

sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati ?

Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo, seyyathidam Sammaditthi, saramasankappo, sammaviica, sammiikammanto,

nniiya
"

Bammiiajlvo sammiivayamo, sammilsati, sammiisamadhi. ||3||

Ayam kho sii, bhikkhave, majjhima patipada Tathagatena
abhisambuddhji cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhifi-

naya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati.

Idam kho

||3||

pana, bhikkhave, dukkhara ariyasaccam

dukkhii, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha,

jati pi

maranam

pi

dukkham, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo

dukkho, yam pi icchara na labhati tam pi dukkham
sankhittena pane' upiidanakkhandha dukkha.

Idam kho

pana,

bhikkhave,

||4||

dukkhasamudayam

ariya-

saccam: yjiyam tanhaponobbhavikii nandi-riiga-sahagata tatra

tatrabhinandini, seyyathidam Kamatanha,bhavatanha, vibha:

vatanha.

||5||

Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam,

yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesa-viriiga-nirodho cago patinissago
mutti analayo.

||t>||

DHAMMACAKKA.

110

Idam kho

pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagilminl pati-

pada ariyasaccam.

Ayam

eva ariyo atthangiko

maggo

sammiisaraadhi.

ditthi

pubbe

nam

pe
dukkhara

ariyasaccan

ananussutesu

dhamraesu

Idam

udapadi.

seyyathidam samraa-

II

ti
me,
bhikkhave,
cakkhura udapiidi, ilii-

udapadi,

pafinu

udapiidi,

||

aloko

udapadi,

vijjii

i|8||

Tam kho

pan' idam dukkham ariyasaccam parifiiieyan ti

bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu
pe
parinnutan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu
cakkhum udapiidi, niinam udapiidi, panfla udapiidi, vijja

me,

udapiidi, aloko udapiidi.

||9||

Idam dukkhasamudayara ariyasaccam

aloko udapiidi.

pe

Tam kho
pahiitabban

kkhave

pan' idam

pahlnan

pe

pe

iiloko udapiidi.

Tam kho
katabban

ti

kkhave,

||

12

ti

me

bhi-

ti

me bhikkhave

1|

pan' idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam sacchila

sacchikatan ti me, bhibhikkhave,

me

iiloko udapiidi.

pe

Idam dukkhanirodhagiimini
bhikkhave,

Tam

ariyasaccam

iiloko udapiidi. ||11||

Idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam

pe

me, bhikkhave,

dukkhasamudayara

me bhikkhave

ti

ti

||10||

pe

||

13

1|

patipadii ariyasaccan

iiloko udapiidi.

||

14

ti

me,

1|

pan' idam
dukkhanirodhagiimini patipadii
ti me, bhikkhave,
bhavetabban
bhiivitan
pe
ariyasaccan
iiloko
ti me, bhikkhave,
pe
udapiidi. ||15||
Yiiva klvafica me, bhikkhave, iraesu catusu ariyasaccesu

evam

kho

ti-parivattara dviidasii-kiiram yathiibhutam niinadassa-

nam na suvisuddham

ahosi

n'eva

tavaham

bhikkhave

sadevake loke samiirake sabrahmake, sassamanabriihmaniyii

pajiiya sadevamanussiiya anuttaram sammiisambodhim abhi-

sambuddho paccafifiilsim. ||16||

Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu
evam tiparivattara dviidasiikiiram yathiibhiitara fiiinadassanam
suvisuddham ahosi, athaham, bhikkhave, sadevake loke samarake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmanlyii pajiiya sadevama-

HI

DHAMMACAKKA.

paccannasim.
ceto-vimutti,
II

18

me dassanam

ayam antimu

adapadi
Akuppa me
n'atthi dani punabbhavo
*

jati,

II

Idam avoca Bhagava

attamana pancavaggiya bhikkbu

Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandanti.

||

19

1|

Imasmim ca pana veyyakaranasmim bbanfiamane

Kondannassa virajam vltaraalam dhammacakkhum
*

Yam

ti

111711

Nanauca pana
ti/

sammusambodhim abhisambuddbo

anuttaram

nussiiya

samudaya-dhammam sabbam

kinci

dhamraanti.'

tarn

ayasraato
udapildi

nirodha-

||20||

dhammacakke Bbumma deva

*
anussavesum
Evam
saddam
Bhagavata Biiranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam,
Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata
:

appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena

Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci lokasmin ti.' I|21||

va

Bhummanam devanam saddam sutva Catumaharajika deva

saddam anussavesum
||22
pe
devanam
saddam sutva, Tavatimsa
Catumaharajikanam
deva saddam anussavesum
||23||
pe
.

1|

Yam a

deva

pe

TusitJi devji

pe

||24||

||25|j

Nimmanarati deva

||26||
pe
Paranimmitavasavattino deva
pe
.

Brahmaparisajja deva
Brahmapurohita deva
Mahiibrahraa deva

pe
pe
pe

Parittabha deva

pe

Appamanabha deva
Abhassara deva

31

||

pe
pe

||

33

Parittasubha deva

||28||

||29|j

30

||

1|

|j

||32li
1|

||34||
pe
deva
35
Appamanasubha
pe
Subhakinnii deva
I|36||
pe
.

||

Vehapphala deva
Asannasatta deva
Avihti deva

Attappa deva
Sudaasa deva

pe

pe
pe
pe

pe
39
||

||

||

1|

||40|(

||41

1|

37
38

II

1|

li

||27||

MAIIASAMAYASUTTA.

112
SudassT devil

pe

Akanitthii deva

pe

Evam Bhagavata

||42||
.

||43||

Biiranasiyam Isipatane Migadiiye anutta-

ram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii

brjihraanena vji devena va Marena vii Brahmunii vii kenaci
lokasmin

vii

ti.

||

44

1|

ha tena khanena tena layena tena rauhuttena yiiva

Brahmalokii saddo abbhuggafichi, ayanca kho dasasahassiIti

lokadhiitu sahkampi, sarapakarapi, sampavedhi

appainiino ca
uliiro obhiiso loke piiturahosi atikkamma deviinam devanu;

bbiivan

ti.

||45||

Atha kho Bhagavii udiinam udiinesi "Anniisi vata bho

Kondafino, afifiiisi vata bho Kondanno ti." ||46||
:

Iti hi'

namam

dara iiyasmato Kondanfiassa Aiiniitakondarifio tv eva

ahosi. ||47i|

DHAMMACAKKAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me

sutam

Ekam samayam Bhagava

Sakkesu

bhikkhuKapilavatthusmim
sabbeh'
eva
bhikkhusatehi
saddhira
paficamattehi
sarighena
arahantehi dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi devatii yebhuyyeua sanni1
patita honti, Bhagavantam dassaniiya bhikkhusanghanca.
mahiivane

viharati

mahatii

||

1|

Atha kho catunnam Suddh&viisa-kiiyikauam devanam etad

ahosi

"

Ayarn kho Bhagavii Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim

mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu-sanghena saddhim paficamattehi
bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva arahantehi, dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi
devatii

yebhuyyena

sannipatitii honti,

gavii

Bhagavantam

niina

mayam

santike paccekam giitham bhiiseyyiimati."

Atha

dassa-

yena Bhaupasasankameyyiima, upasankamitvii Bhagavato

naya bhikkhu-sanghafica.
ten'

Yan

kho

tii

devata

||

pi

1|

seyyathiipi niima balavii

puriso

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.

113

samminjitam va baham pasareyya pasaritara va baham

samminjeyya evam evam kho Suddhslvasesu devesu antarahita Bhagavato purato paturahamsu. ||3||
Atha kho ta devatii Bhagavantam abhivadetvji ekamantam attharasu ekamantam thitii kho eka devatii Bhaga:

vato santike

imam gatham
"

abhasi

Mahasaraayo pavanasmim
deva-kaya samagata
AgatamhcT imam dhammasamayam
!

dakkhitaye aparajitasanghan"

ti.

||

1|

Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham

abhasi

" Tatra
bhikkhavo samadahamsu
cittam attano ujukam akamsu
Sarathi va nettiini gahetva
"
indriyani rakkhanti pandita

Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato

abhasi

ti. ||2||

imam gatham

santike

" Chetva khilam chetva

paligham
indakhllam uhaccam aneja

Te caranti suddha vimala

cakkhumata sudanta susunag^"

ti. ||3||

Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam giitham

abhasi

"

Ye
na

keci buddhara saranam gatase

te gamissanti

apayam
deham
manusam
Pahaya

"
ti.

devakayam paripuressanti

Atha kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi

||

1|

"

Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhjitusu devata

Tathagatam dassanaya bhikkhu sahghanca. Ye
pi te, bhikkhave, ahesum atitain addhanam arahanto sammasambuddha, tesara pi Bhagavantiinam ete paramii yeva devata
Ye pi to,
sannipatita ahesum, seyyatha pi mayham etarahi.
sannipatita

bhikkhave, bhavissanti aniigatara addhanam arahanto sammasambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva
8

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.

114

devata sannipatita bbavissanti, seyyatha pi

rahi." 5
II

"

mayham

eta-

II

AcikkhissJimi, bhikkhave

niimani, kitta-

devakJiyJinara

ylssami, bhikkhave, devakayjinam niimani, desissiitni, bhiTarn suniitha, sildhukam

kkhave, dcvakayjinam niimani.

manasikarotha

bhiisissjimiti. ||6||

"

" Evara bhante

sum.
**

ti.

Te bhikkhn Bhagavato paccasso-

BhagavcT etad avoca:

||7||

Silokam anukassiimi, yathii bhummii tad

Ye

sitii

Puthu

assita

girfgabbharam pahitattti samahitii

sihii

va

salllnii

lomaharasabhisambhuno

Odiita manasti saddhil vippassanara aniivila

Bhiyo pauca-sate
Tato iimantayi

iiatvii

vane Kiipilavatthave.

satthii siivake siisane rate

Ill

||

Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijaniitha bhikkhave ?

Te ea atappam akarum sutvii Buddhassa siisanam

Tesam

piitur

ahu nanam amanussilna dassanam.

||2||

App' eke satam addakkhum sahassam atha sattati

Satam eke sahassiinain araanussiinam addarasu
App eke 'nantam adakkhum disii sabba phutii ahu
Tafica sabbam abhinfiiiya pavakkhitviina cakkhumii
Tato amantayi

satthii siivake siisane rate

Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijiiniitha bhikkhave ?

Ye

vo 'ham kittayissiimi

Sattasahassii

giriihi

anupubbaso.

||

1|

Yakkhii ea bhummii Kiipilavatthavii

Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino

Modamiinii abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim

nam.

Cha sahassii Hemavatii Yakkhii niinatta-vannino

Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamiinii abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim
naro.

va-

||4||

1)5

1|

Satagirii ti-sahassil

Yakkhii

Ice ete solasa sahassa Yakkhii

Vessamittil paflca

satii

Yakkhii

pe

pe
po

||6||

||7||

||

II

va-

Hg

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Kumbhiro Riijagahiko Vepullassa nivesanam,
Bhiyo nam satasahassam Yakkliunara payirupasati,
Kumbhiro Rajagahiko so p' iiga samitim vanara. ||9||
Puriraaiica disam

riijii

Dhatarattho tam

pasiisati

Gandhabbiinarn adhipati mahariijii yasassi so.

Puttii pi tassa bahavo indanama mahabbala

Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino

Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim

va-

nam. moil

Dakkhinanca disam raja Virulho tam pasiisati

Kumbhandanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so
Putta pi tassa

pe

II

11

II

Pacchimanca disam raja VirOpakkho tam

Niigiinauca adhipati mahiiriijii yasassi

Putta pi tassa

pe

II

12

pasiisati

so.

1|

riija Kuvero tam pasiisati

Yakkhanain adhipati mahariija yasassi so

Uttarafica disam

Putta pi tassa

pe

||

13

il

Purimam disam

Dhatarattho, dakkhinena Virulhako

Pacchimena Virupakkho, Kuvero uttaram disam
Cattaro te maharaja samantii caturo disa
Daddallamana attharasu vane Kiipilavatthave. I|14||

Tesam mayiivino dasii agu vancanika sathii

Maya Kutendu Vetendu Vitucca Yitucco saha
Candano Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca
Paniido Opamanrio ca devasuto ca Miitali
Citta-Seno ca Gandhabbo Nalaraja Janesabho
Agum Pancasikho ceva Timbaru Suriyavaccasa

Ete c' aiine ca riijiino Gandhabbii saha riijubhi

ModamiiDa abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim
nam. II15II

Ath^gu

Niibhasii

Naga Yesala

saha Tacchaka

Kambalassatara iigu Payiigii saha niitibhi,

Yilmunii Dharattha ca iigu Niigii yasassino
Eriivano Mahauilgo so p' iigu samitim vanam.

II

16

j|

va-

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.

116

Ye nagaraje sahasa haranti

dibba dvijii pakkhi visuddhacakkhu
vehasaya

te vana-majjlia-pattii

Supanna iti tesam naraam

abhayam tadii Nagarajanam asi
Supannato khemara akasi Buddho
Sanhiihi viicJihi upavhayanta
NagcT Supanna saranam againsu Buddham.
Citta

||171l

Jita vajira-hatthena samuddara asiira sita.

Bhataro Vasavas* ete iddhimanto yasassino.

Kiilakanja mahahimsa asura Danaveghasa

Vepacitti Sucitti ca Paharado Namuci saha
Satafica Baliputtanam sabbe

verocanamaka

Rahubhaddam upagaraum
bhadante, bhikkhunam samitim

Sannayhitva balim senam

Samayo
nam.

dani,

va-

||18|(

ca deva Pathavl Tejo Yayo tad agamum

Varuna Varuna deva Somo ca Yasasii saha

Apo

Mettakaruna-kayika agu deva yasassino

Das' ete dasadhakayii sabbe nanatta-vannino
Idhiraanto
samitim vanam 19
pe
II

II

Venhu

ca deva Sahall ca

Asama

ca duve

Yama

Candass* upanissii deva candam agu purakkhatvii

Suriyass* upanissa deva suriyam agu purakkhatva
Nakkhattani purakkhatva ilgu mandavalahaka
Vasunam Yasavo settho Sakko p' iigu Purindado

Das' ete dasadbakaya sabbe nanatta-vannino

Iddhimanto
samitim vanam. 20
pe
II

II

Ath' iigu Sahabhu deva jalam aggi sikhii-r-iva

Aritthaka ca Roja ca Umraa-puppha-nibhiisino
Yaruna saha Dhammii ca Accutii ca Anejaka

Suleyya Pucirii agu, iigu Yasavanesino

Das' ete dasadha kaya
samitim vanam.
pe
Samanii Mahasamanii Miinusainanusuttama

Khiddapadusika agu,

iigu

Manupadusikii

II

21

II

MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Ath&gu Harayo

117

ye ca Lohitavasino
deva yasassino

devii

Piiragii Mahiiparagii iigu

Das *ete

dasadhii kiiyii

pe

saraitim vanam.

||

22

II

II

23

II

II

24

II

Karumha Arunii agu Yeghanasa saha

Odatagayhii Pamokkha agu deva Vicakkhana

Sukhii

Sadiimatta Haragaja Missaka ca yasassino

Thanayara agu Pajjunno yo disa abhivassati

Das' ete dasadha kaya

pe

samitim vanam.

Khemlyii Tusita Yiiraa Katthakii ca yasassino

nama ca Asava
Nimmanaratino agu ath' agu Paranimmita
Das' ete dasadha kaya
samitim vanam.
pe
Larabitakii Liimasettha Joti

Satth' ete deva-nikaya sabbe nanatta-vannino

Nama-dvayena aganchum ye c' aniie sadisa saha

Pamutthajjitim akhllara oghatinnam anasavam

Dakkhem' oghataram Nagam candam va asitatigam.'

II

25

Subrahma Paramatto ca putta iddhimato saha

Sanam kumaro Tisso ca so p' agu samitim vanam. 26
II

Sahassa Brahmalokanam

Mahabrahma

Upapanno jutimanto bhismakayo

II

bhititthati

yasassl so.

Das' ettha issara agu pacceka-vasavattino

Tesaiica majjhato agu Harito parivarito. 28

II

27

II

II

II

Te ca sabbe abhikkante sa-Inda-deve sa-brahmake

Marasena abhikkami

Passa kanhassa mandiyam.

||

29

Ettha ganhatha bandhatha ragena bandham atthu ve

Samanta parivaretha ma vo muficittha koci nam.' 30
||

Iti tattha mahaseno kanhasenam apesayi

Panina talam ahacca saram katvana bheravam
Yatha pavussako megho thanayanto savijjuko
Tada so paccudavatti sankuddho asayam vasl. I|31||

Tauca sabbam abhinnaya pavakkhitvana cakkhumu

Tato amantayi sattha siivake siisane rate
Marasena abhikkantu te vijanatha bhikkhavo P
:

1|

1|

II

ALAVAKASUMTA.

118

Te ca atappam akalrum

sutvii

Buddhassa sasanam.

apakkamum na sam lomam

Yitariigeh'

pi iujayum.

Sabbe vijita sarigamii-bhay&bhita yasassino

Modanti saha bhutehi suvaku te jane sutati.

||

32

1|

i|33||

MAHASAMAYASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDHASSA.

Ekam saraayam Bhagava Alaviyam
Yakkhassa bhavane. Atha kho Alavako
Yakkho yena Bhagava ten' upasahkami upasankamitva Bhaga van tarn etad avoca
" Nikkhama samanH " ti.
" Sadhavuso " ti.
Bhagava nikkhami.
" Pavisa samani " ti.
" * Sadh&vuso " ti.
Bhagavii pavisi.
kho
Alavako
yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca
Dutiyam pi
*'
Nikkhama samana " ti.
" Sadhavuso " ti.
Bhagava nikkliami.
" Pavisa samana " ti.
Evam me

sutara

viharati Alavakassa

'

'

'

" 'Sadhavuso

"
ti.

Bhagava

pavisi.

Tatiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca:

" Nikkhama samana " ti.
" Sadhavuso " ti.
Bhagava nikkhami.
" Pavisa samanaL " ti.
" Sadhavuso ** ti.
Bhagava pavisi.
Catutthara pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad
"
avoca " Nikkhama samana ti.
" 'Na kho
pan&ham avuso nikkhamissiimi. Yan te karanl*

'

'

yam

tarn karohi

"

ti.

Sace me na bya"Paiihara tam samana pucchissami.

va
te
karissasi, cittam
khipissami, hadayain va te phalessami,

padesu va gahetva param Gangaya khipissami

ti."

AI.AVAKASUTTA.
" 'Na khviiham

yo

me

sadevake loke, samabruhmaniya pajiiya sadevama-

tain, avuso, passilmi

rake, sabrahmake, sassaraana

nussjiya,

119

cittam

vii

khipeyya, hadayara

vii

padesu
gahetvji pjiram Gangiiya khipeyya.
"
avuso puccha yadu kankhasi
ti.

vii

phaleyya,

Api ca tvam

'

"Xim sMha

vittam purisassa settham? kimsu sucinno

sukham avahati ?
Kimsu have siidhutaram rasaaam
ahu setthan ? " ti. 1
||

"

katham jivim jivitam

1|

Saddh' idha vittam purisassa settham,

sukham avahati,
Saecam have sadhutaram rasanam,
ahu setthan'" ti. ||2||
" Kathamsu

Kathamsu

dhammo

sucinno

parina jIvim jivitam

ogham ? kathain tarati annavam ?

dukkham acceti ? kathamsu parisujjha-

tarati

titi?"||3||

"

Saddhaya

tarati

ogham, appamadena annavam,

Viriyena dukkham

"

'

acceti, pafinaya parisujjhati.

" Kathamsu labhate

patinam

||4||

kathamsu vindate dhanam?

Kathamsu kittim pappoti? katham mittani gantheti ?
Asma loka param lokam katham pecca na socati ? " 5
?

||

"

'

1|

Saddahauo arahatam dhammam nibbanapattiya

Sussusam labhate parliiam appamatto vicakkhano.
Patirupakarl dhurava vutthata vindate dhanam
Saccena kittim pappoti dadam mittani ganthati,

Asmii loka param lokain evam pecca na

socati.

Yass' ete caturo dhammil saddhassa gharamesino

Saecam dhammo dhiti cago sa ve pecca na socati.

Ingha anne pucchassu puthu samanabriihmane

Yadi sacca dama caga khanty&bhiyyo' dha vijjati. "
'

"

||6|I

Katham nu dani puccheyyam puthu samanabriihmane

Sv4ham ajja pajanami so attho saraparayiko.
Atthaya vata mo Buddho viisayalavim itgato

PARABHAVASUTTA.

120

Yo* ham ajja pajanami yattha dinnam roahapphalam

So aham vicarissami giirailgamam purapurara

sambuddham dhammassa

Naraassaraano

matan"

ti.

ca

sudham-

II7II

ALAVAKASUTTAM.

Evam me sutam

Ekam samayam

Bhagavii Savatthiyara

viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa ariime.

Atha kho ailfiatara devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavannii kevala-

kappam Jetavanam

obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten* upasankami upasahkaraitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekamantani atthasi, ekamantara thita kho sa devata Bhagavantam
gathaya ajjhabhasi.
**

Parabhavantam purisam mayam pucchiima Gotaraarn

Bhagavantam putthum iigamma kim parabhavato

mukham?"
**

Suvijiino

||i||

bhavam

hoti, suvijano parjlbhavo

Dhammakamo bhavam

hoti,

dhammadessi

parabha-

vo.'"||2||

" Iti h' etam

vijaniima

Dutiyam Bhagava
kham?"||3||
"

Asant* assa

kham.'"

II

mu-

parabhavato

na kurute piyam

roceti

so pariibhavo

kim

piyji honti, sante

dhammam

asantam

pathamo
bruhi

tam

mu-

parabhavato

II

"Iti h' etam vijjinaraa dutiyo so pariibhavo

tatiyam Bhagava bruhi: kim parabhavato mukham?"
:

"

Niddasill

sahJisTli anutthatii

alaso kodhapannjito,

" Iti

h'

etam

catuttham

Bhagavii

kham?"

1I7||

1|

ca yo naro

tam parabhavato mukham.' "

vijaniiraa

||

||6||

tatiyo so pariibhavo

bruhi

kim

pariibhavato

mu-

rARABHAVASUTTA.
"

Yo miltaram vii pitaram va jinnakaip gata-yobbanam

pahusanto na bharati, tarn pariibhavato mukham.*" ||8||

"

Iti h*

etam

catuttho so parabhavo

vijaniiraa

paucamam Bhagava bruhi

kham?"
"

121

va samanam va annam va pi vanibba-

rausavadena vaBceti, tam parabhavato raukham.'

" Iti

etam vijanama

h'

chattham
"

"
||

paiicamo so parabhavo
bruhi
kim parabhavato

Bhagava

"kham?"

mu-

parabhavato

|!9||

Yo brahraanam
kam

'

kim

1|

mu-

1|11||

PahQvitto puriso sa-hiranno sa-bhojano

"
eko bhufijati sadhuni, tam parabhavato mukhara.'

**

10

Iti h' etam vijanama

sattamam Bhagava

||12||

chattho so parabhavo

bruhi

kim parabhavato

mu-

kham?"||13||
"

Jatitthaddho, dhanatthaddho, gottatthaddho ca yo naro

tam iiatim
"

Iti h'

tam parabhavato mukham.' "

atimafineti,

etam vijanama

I|14||

sattamo so parabhavo

Attham Bhagava bruhi kim parabhavato mukham ? " ||15I|

:

"

'

Itthidhutto, suradhutto, akkhadhutto ca

laddham

laddhara
"

kham.'
"

Iti h'

yo naro

mu-

parabhavato

||16*l|

etam vijanama

navamam

||

17

atthamo so parabhavo
bruhi

Bhagava

kham?"
*

vinaseti,

tam

kim parabhavato

mu-

1|

" Sehi darehi santuttho

vesiya upadissati
dissati paradaresu,

tam parabhavato mukham.*"

" Iti h' etam

vijanamo

dasamam

Bhagava

kham?"
**

||

19

navamo
bruhi

so

||18||

parabhavo

kim

parabhavato

mu-

1|

Atlta-yobbano poso aneti timbarutthanim

tassa issa

na

supati,

tam parabhavato mukham.'"

||20||

VASALASUTTA.

122

" Iti
h' etam vijaniima

dasamo

ekiidasamam

Bhagavu
kham?"||21||

"

Iti h'

etam vijaniima
|l

'

Appabhogo
so

'dha

parjibhavato

mu-

ekiidasamo so parabhavo
briihi:

kirn

pariibhavato

mu-

1|

raahiitanho khattiye jiiyate kule

rajjam
"

kham.'
*

parabhavo

kim

vJi pi tadisam
"
tarn
issariyasmim thiipeti
||22||
pariibhavato mukham.'

dvadasamarn Bhagava
kham ?" 23

*'

so
:

Itthl-sondim vikiranim purisara

"

'*

briihi

patthayati

24

||

tam

pariibhavato

mu-

1|

Ete pariibhave loke pandito samavekkhiya

ariyo dassana-sarapatto salokam bhajate sivau'"

ti. ||25||

PARABHAVASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AUAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evarn
viharati

me sutam
Jetavane

Ekara samayara Bhagava Siivatthiyam

Atha kko
Aniithapindikassa iiriime.

Bhagava pubbanha samayara

Siivatthiyam pindiiya

piivisi.

nivasetvii pattaclvaram

Tena kho

iidiij'a

pand saraayena

Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesane aggi pajjalito

hoti iihuti paggahitii.

||

1|

Atha kho Bhagavii Siivatthiyam sapadiinam

pindiiya cara-

mano, yena Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesanam,

Addasii kho Aggika-Bhiiradviijo
ten' uppasankami. ||2||
briihmano Bhagavantam dilrato agacchantara disviiua Bhagavantam etad avoca
" Tatr' eva
mundaka, tatr' eva samanaka, tatr' eva vasalaka
3
titthiThi ti."
:

||

Evam

vutte

etad avoca

1|

Bhagava Aggika-Bhiiradviijam briihraanam

VASALASUTTA.

123

" * Junilsi
pana tvam briihmana, vasalam va vasala-karane
"

va dhamrae

ti.'

||4||

"Na

khvaham, bho Gotaraa, janjimi vasalam va vasalakarane vii dhamme ti. Sadhu me bhavam Gotamo tatha

dhammara

desetu

karane va

dhamme

"

Tena

bhasissami

yathaham janeyyam vasalam va

vasala-

ti."

brahraana, sunahi siidhukam manasikarohi

5

hi,

"
ti.'

||

"Evam bho"

(I

ti

gavato paccassosi.

kho Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmauo Bha6

Bhagava etad avoca
:

||

11

Xodhano upanahl ca papamakkhi ca yo naro

vipannaditthi mayavl, tarn jafina vasalo

Ekajam va dijam va

pi

II

II

yo 'dha panani himsati.

yassa pane daya n'atthi, tarn

Yo

iti.

jaiifia

vasalo

iti.

||2||

hanti parirundhati giimani nigamani ca

niggahako samannato, tarn janiia vasalo

iti. ||3||

Game va yadi varanfie yam paresam mamayitam

theyya adinnam adiyati, tarn jafifia vasalo iti. ||4||

Yo

have inara adiiya vuccamano palayati

na

hi te

inam

atthiti, tarn

janna vasalo

iti. ||5||

Yo ve kincikkha-kamyata panthasmim vajatam janam

hantva kincikkham adeti, tarn janiia vasalo iti. ||6||

Yo attahetu parahetu dhanahetu ca yo naro

sakkhiputtho musabruti, tarn jaiina vasalo iti.
Yo

natinam sakhanam va daresu

patidissati

sahasa sampiyena va, tarn janna vasalo

Yo mataram

vii

iti. ||8||

pitaram va jinnakam gatayobbanam

pahusanto na bharati,

Yo mataram

tarn

janna vasalo

iti.

||9

1|

va pitaram va bhiitaram va bhaginim

sassum hanti roseti va, tam janna vasalo

Yo attham

||7||

iti.

||

10

1|

pucchito santo anattham anusiisati.

paticchantena manteti, tam janna vasalo

iti.

||

1111

VASALASUTTA.

124

Yo

katvii piipalcam

karamam

mam jafifiil

mji

80 paticchaiina-kammaiito, tarn junnii vasalo

'

ti

icchati

iti. ||12||

Yo

ve parakulam gantva bhutvana sucibhojanam

agatam na patlpujeti, tam jafifia vasalo iti. ||13||

Yo

briibraanam vii samanain va

musavadena

Yo brahmanam
roseti vaca

anuam va

vanceti, tarn jafifia vasalo

iti.

pi vanibbakara
||14||

va samanam va bbattakale upattbite

na ca

deti,

tam janfia

vasalo

iti. ||15||

Asatam yo 'dba pabriiti mobena paliguntbite

kincikkbam nijigimsano, tam janna vasalo iti.

Yo

c'attanarn

samukkamse

||16||

parafica avajanati

nibino sena manena, tain janna vasalo

iti.

17

||

1|

Rosako kadariyo ca papiccho maccbarl satbo

abiriko anottapl, tain janfia vasalo

Yo buddbam

paribhiisati atba

paribbajam gabattham. va,

Yo
ete

vasalo

iti. ||19||

patijiiniiti

kbo vasaladbamo

kbo vasala vutta may a vo ye

Na jacca

||18(|

va tassa savakam

tam janna

ve anaraba santo, arabam

coro sabrabraake loke esa

iti.

pakasitii.

||

20

1|

vasalo hoti, na jacca boti brabmano

vasalo boti, kammana boti brabmano.

kammana

Tadamina
"

pi jantitba yatba

me 'dam

CandJilaputto Sopiiko Miitango

iti

||21||

nidassanam

vissuto. ||22[|

So yasam paramam patto Miitango

yam sudullabbam

agancbum tass'upatthanamkbattiya brahmanjibabu. H23||

So devayjinam iiruyha virajam so mabiipatbam
kamaragam virajetva brabmalokupago iibu. ||24||

Na nam

jiiti

nivjiresi

brabraalokQpapattiya,

mantabandbuno
25
Te ca papcsu kammesu abhinbain upadissare
dittb 'eva dbamrae garayhii sampariiye ca duggatim
"
na te jati nivareti duggacca garabaya va:
||26||
ajjbiiyakiikule jiita brahmanii

||

1|

kasIbharadvajasutta.

Na jacca

vasalo hoti,

kammana

Evam

vasalo hoti,

126

na jacca hoti brahmano

kammana hoti brahmano.

||27||

vutte Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bhagavantain

etad avoca
" *

Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Gotama

nikkujjitain va ukkujjeyya, paticchannarn va vivareyya,
inu}hassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam
evam eva
dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhinantiti
bhota Gotamanena aneka pariyayena dhamrao pakasito.
Es^hain Bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchami dhammanca bhikkhusahghaiica Upasakam mam bhavam Gotamo
"
7
dharetu, ajjatagge panupetam saranam gatan ti
!

'

||

li

VASALASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AEAHATO SAMMA

SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam

Ekam samayam Bhagava Magadhesu

viharati Dakkhiniigirismiin

Ekanalayam brahmanagiime. 1
Tena kho pana samayena Kasibharadviijassa brahmanassa
||

paiicamattani nangala-satiini payuttani honti vappakiile.

1|

||2||

Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasaraayam nivasetva patta-clvaram adaya yena Kaslbhilradvajassa brahmanassa kammanto,
ten' upasafikami.
3
Tena kho pana samayena Kasibhabrahmanassa
radviijassa
parivesana vattati. ||4|| Atha kho
||

1|

Bhagava yena parivesanii ten' upasankami upasankamitva

ekamantam atthasi. addasa kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano

Bhagavantam etad avoca

"Aham

kho, samana, kasami ca vaparai ca, kasitvii ca

vapitva ca bhunjami. Tvam pi samana kasassu ca vapassu
kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjassu ti."
" *
Aham pi kho, briihmana, kasiimi ca vapami ca kasitvii
ca vapitva ca bhunjiimi
" Na kho

pana

vii

nangalam

vii

ti.'

mayam

"

passiima bhoto Gotamassa yugara

phiilam va piicanam vu balivaddam

vii."

kasTbharadvajasutta.

126

Atha ca pana bhavam Gotamo evain aha

" Aham
pi kho brahmana kasaini ca vapiitni ca kasitva
:

ca vapitva ca bhunjiiiniti.'

"

Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo

ajjhabhiisi:

briihraano

Bhagavantam gathaya

\\b\\

" Kassako
patijanasi na ca passama te kasim
kasino pucchito bruhi, yatha janemu te kasim."
"

Saddha bijam, tapo

hirim

vutthi, panfia

mano yottam,

sati

me

||

1|

yuga-nangalara

me

phiilapaeanam. ||2||
Kiiyagutto vacTgutto iihare udare yato
saccam karomi tiddtinam soraccam me pamocanam. ||3||
Tsii,

Viriyara

me dhura-dhorayham yogakkhemadhivahanam

gacchati ativattanam yattha gantvii na

Evam

socati.

||4||

esa kasi katthii sa hoti amatapphala

"
etam kasim kasitvana sabbadukkba pamuccatiti.'

||5||

Atha kho Kaslbharadviijo briihmano mahatiya kamsiipatiya

payasam vaddhetva Bhagavato upanamesi
"
Bhunjatu bhavam Gatamo payasam Kassako bhavam,
yamhi bhavam Gotamo amatapphalam kiisim kiisatiti." 6
:

i|

"

Gathabhigltam me abhojaneyyam
sampassatam brahmana n' esa dhammo
gathabhigltam panudanti buddhii
"
sati, brahmana, vutti-r-esa.'

dhamme
"

1|

||6||

Aiinena ca kevalinam mahesim

khin&savam kukkuccavupasantara
annena piiuena upatthahassu
"
kbettam hi tain punnapekhassa hotiti/
" Atha kassa c&hara bho Gotama

||7||

imam

payitsam dammiti."
tam, brahmana, passiirai sadevake loke
samarake sabrahmake sassamanabriihraaniya pajiiya sadeva*'

'

Na khvaham

yassa so payaso bhutto sammii pariniimam

annatra
Tathagatassa vii Tathiigatasiivakassa va
gaccheyya,
tena hi tvam, brahmana, tam payasam appaharite va chaddeti
appjinake va udake opilapehiti. 7

manussaya,

||

|j

Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo brahmano tam payasam appa-

SACCAVIBHANOA.
nake udake

opililpesi.

Atha kho

127
udake pakkhitto

so piiyaso

seyyaciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhiipayati sampadhiipayati

thapi niima phiilo divasti santatto udake pakkhitto ciccitiiyati
:

sandliupiiyati

ciccitayati
pjiyiiso

udake pakkhitto

sampadhiipayati.

Atha kho

sampadhiipayati

evam

eva

so

ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhupiiyati

||8||

Kaslbhiiradviijo briihmano
ten'

samviggo lomahatthaupasankami upasankamitva Bhaga-

yena Bhagavii
vato piidesu sirasii nipatitvii Bhagavantam etad avoca
"
Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam, bho Gotama

jiito

seyyathapi bho Gotama nikkujjitam vii ukkujjeyya, patichannam va vivareyya, miilhassa va maggam acikkheyya,
andhakare va telapajjotam dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani
Evam eva, bho Gotama, aneka pariyayena
dakkhintiti
:

dbammo pakiisito. Esaham bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchiimi dhammaiica bhikkhu-sanghailca. Labheyyarn
ahara bhoto Gotamassa santike pabbajjam labheyyarn upasampadan ti." 9
||

1|

Alattha kho Kaslbharadviijo brahmano Bhagavato santike

pabbajjam, alattha upasarapadara.

Acirupasampanno kho
eko
viipakattho appamatto atiipl
pan' ayasmii Bhiiradviijo
viharanto na cirass' eva yass'

pahitatto

atthiij'a

kulaputta
anutta-

sammad eva agarasma anagiiriyam pabbajanti, tad

ram brahmacariya-pariyosiinam ditth' eva dhamme

sayam.

abhiiiiia sacchikatva upasarapajja vihiisi.

" Khlnii

naparam

jati,

vusitara brahmacariyam,

itthattiij'ati," abhiunii anfiataro

Bharadviijo arahatara ahositi.

katam karanlyam,

ca kho pan' ayasmii

||10||

KASIBHARADVAJASUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me

Ekara samayam Bhagavii Biininasiyam

Tatra kho Bhagavii bhikkhu
amantesi: 'bhikkhavo' ti, 'bhadante* ti. Te bhikkhu Bhasutain

viharati Isipatane Migadiiye.

gavato paccassosum.

Bhagavii etad avoca

II

1|

SACCAVIBHANGA.

128
"

bhikkhave,

Tathagatena,

arahatii

sammitsainbuddhena

Buninasiyam Isipatane Migadilye anuttaram dhammacakkam

pavattitam appativattiyam saruanena vu bruhmanena vii
devena va Miirena va Brahrauna va kenaci va lokasmin

Yad idam
patji

catunnain ariyasaccanam acikkhata desatil

ti.

pafifia-

patthapata vivaranii vibhajanji uttaDakammam.

Katamesam catunnam

Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata

pe
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata

Dukkhanirodhagaiuinlpatipada

pe

pe

acikkhata

ariyasaccassa

.11211

pe

bhikkhave,

Tathagatena,

arahata

sammasambuddhena

Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhamraacakkain

pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
devena va Marena va Brahrauna vii kenaci va lokasmim
:

yad

idam

pe.
"

imesam catunnam

acikkhata

ariyasaccanam

11311

Sevetha, bhikkhave, Sariputta-Moggalhme, bhejatha, bhi-

kkhave, Sariputta-Moggallane pandita bhikkhu anuggahaka

brahmacarinam seyyathapi bhikkhave, janetti evam Sari:

Sari-

putto: seyyathapi jatassa apiidetiievam Moggallano.

putto, bhikkhave, sotapatti-phale vineti ; Moggallano iittamatthe vineti ; Sariputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattiiri ariyasaccjini vittharena

acikkhitum desetum paiinapetum vivarituni

vibhajitura uttaniikiitun

ti.

Idam avoca Bhagavii

viharara pavisi.

II

idam vatva Sugato utthayasana

1|

Tatra kho iiyasma Sariputto acirapakkantassa Bhagavato

bhikkhu amantesi
'Avuso bhikkhavo' ti 'avuso* ti kho. te bhikkhii ayasmato
:

Ayasraa Sariputto etad avoca

"Tathagatena, avuso, arahata sammasambuddhena Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam
pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
Sariputtassa paccassosum

devena va Marena va BrahmunJi

yad idam catunnam

vii

kenaci

ariyasacciinaTn iicikkhatii

vii

lokasmim:

pe

II

1|

SACCAVIBHANOA.

129

Xatamesam catunnam ?
Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ilcikkhata
pe
pe
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ticikkhata
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu
pe

Bukkhanirodhagaminlpatipadassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu

.11611

pe

dukkhara ariyasaccam ?
pi dukkhii, jarii pi dukkha, vyiidhi pi dukkha, maranam pi dukkhara, soka-parideva-dukkha-domanass-upayasa
dukkha yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham, sanKataraa
" Jati

ca, avuso,

khittena pane' upadiinakkhandha dukkha.

Katamii ca avuso jiiti ?

Ya

tesam tesam sattiinam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye

jati

sanjati okkanti abhinibbatti khandhiinain piitubhavo ayatinanain patiliibho.

Ayam vuccat' avuso jati. ||1||

Katama

Ya

ca avuso jara ?

tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jara,

khandiccam, paliccam valittacata ayuno samhani

indriyanam paripako. Ayam vuccat' avuso jara. ||2||

jTranata,

Katama

ca avuso

maranam ?

Ya

tesam tesam sattiinam tamha tamha sattanikaye cuti

cavanata bhedo antaradhanam maccu maranam kalakiriya
khandhiinara

Katama

Idam

bhedo kalebarassa nikkhepo.

avuso maranam.

vuccat'

||3||

ca avuso soko ?

Yo kho

avuso afiiiatarannatarena byasanena samannagadukkhadhammena phutthassa soko

tassa annatarannatarena
socanti

socanattam

avuso soko.

Katama

Yo kho

antosoko antoparisoko.

Ayam

vuccat'

||4||

ca iivuso paridevo ?

avuso annatarannatarena byasanena samannagadukkhadhammena phutthassa adevo

tassa annatarannatarena

paridevo

iidevo

paridevo iidevanJi paridevana adevitattam

Ayam vuccat' iivuso paridevo. 5

paridevitattara.
Katama ca dukkham?

Yam

kho

iivuso

kayikam

II

dukkham

kiiyikam

samphassajam dukkham asiitam vedayitam.

avuso dukkham. 6
|j

1|

1|

Idam

kiiya-

vuccat'

SACCAVIBHANGA.

130

Katamu

Yam

^l^also domanossam P
kho avuso cetasikam dukkham cetasikam

ca

nosamphassajam dukkham asutam vedayitam.

uvuso domanassam. 7
II

asiitam

Idam

ma-

vuccat*

II

atamii ca iivuso upayiiso ?

Yo kho iivuso anfjatarannatarena byasanena saraannugatena
aniiatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa uyiiso upii-

Ayam

yaso ayiisitattam upayasitattam.

'

yaso.

vuccat' avuso upa-

II8II

Katama ca avuso yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi

dukkham ?
Jatidhammanam cTvuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati
"aho vata mayam na jatidhammii assama, na ca vata no jati
agaccheyy&ti na kho pan' etara icchjiya pattabbam." Idam
pi yam p' iccham na labhati, tam pi dukkham.
Jaradhammtinara iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati
:

mayam na jariidhamma assiima, na ca vata no jarii

Idam
iigaccheyyati na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam."
na
labhati
tam pi dukkham.
pi yam p' iccham
*'aho vata

Byiidhidhammiinara avuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati

" aho ca vata
mayam na byiidhidhammii assiima, na ca vata no
:

na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam."

iccham
na labhati tam pi dukkham.
pi yam p'
Maranadhammiinain iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati
" aho ca vata
mayam na maranadhamma assiima, na ca vata no
maranarn iigaccheyyati na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam."
Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
byiidhi agaccheyyati

Idam

Soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass-upiiyasii dhammiinam avuso

evam icchii uppajjati " aho vata raayarn na soka-

sattiinam

paridevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisa dhammii assiima, na ca vata

no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisii iigaccheyum: na kho

Idam pi yam p' iccham na
pan* etam icchiiya pattabbam."
labhati tam pi dukkham. ||9||
Katamii c&vuso sankhittena pancupiidiinakkhandhii dukkhii?
Seyyathldara Riipupiidiinakkhandho, vedanupiidiinakkhandho, sanfiupiidiinakkhandho, saiikhiirupiidiinakkhandho, viIme vuccat' iivuso sankhittena
ilnanupiidiinakkhandhii.
:

pailcupadiiQakkhandhii dukkhii.

||

10

1|

SACCAVIBHANGA.

131

vuccat* iivuso dukkhara ariyasaccam.

Idam

||7I|

Xatama

ca avuso dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ?

tanba
ponobbhavikanandiraga-sahagata tatra tatriYayara
bbinaadinl seyyathldam
:

Kiimatanba bbavatanba vibbavatanba.

dukkbasamudayam ariyasaccam.

Katama

Yo

||

Idara vuccat' avuso

1|

ca avuso dukkbanirodbam ariyasaccam ?

tassa

yeva tanbaya asesaviraganirodbo ciigo patinissago

mutti analayo. Idam vuccat' avuso dukkbanirodbam ariyasaccam. [|9||

Katama
saccam

ca avuso dukkbanirodbagaraini patipada ariya-

sammadittbi, sammasankappo, sammavaca, sammakammanto, sammaajlvo, samma-vayamo, sammasati, sammasamadbi.

eva ariyo attbangiko maggo

Ayam

Katama

Yam

seyyatbidam

ca avuso sammadittbi ?

kbo avuso dukkbe-fianam, dukkbasamudaye-nanam,

dukkbanirodbe-nanam, dukkbanirodba-gaminlpatipadaya-nanam. ^Ayam vuccat' avuso sammadittbi. 1

||

Katama

ca avuso

sammasankappo

Nekkbammasankappo

Ayam

kappo.

Katama

avibimsasan-

abyilpadasahkappo

vuccat' avuso

ca avuso

1|

sammasankappo.
sammavaca ?

II

II

Musavjidii veramani pisunavacaya veramani pbarusavacjiya

veramani sampbappalapaya veramani. Ayam vuccat' avuso
sammavaca. ||3||

Katama

ca avuso

sammakammanto ?

Panatipjita veramani adinnadanii veramani kiimesu miccbilcara veramani.

Ayam vuccat' avuso sammakammanto. ||4||

Katama

ca avuso samma-ajlvo.

Idb' avuso ariyasavako miccba

jivikam

ajlvena
ajivo.

II

kappeti.

Ayam

ajlvam pabaya, sammavuccat' avuso samma

II

Katama

ca avuso samraavayiimo ?

Idb' avuso bbikkbu anuppanniinam papakiinam akusalanam

SACCAVIBHANGA.

182

dhammiinam

anuppildiiya chandam janeti vayamati viriyam

urabhati cittam pagganhuti padahati.

Uppanniinam papakilnam akusaliinam dhammunam pahiipe

padahati.
nuya chandam janeti
kusahTnam
dhammunam
Anuppannanara
uppiidiiya chandam
pe

janeti

padahati.

Uppannanam kusaliinam dhammanam

thitiya

asammohiiya

bhiyo bhiivuya vepulliiya bhavaniiya paripfiriya chandam

Ayam
janeti vayamati viriyam arabhati cittam padahati.
vuccat* iivuso sammavayiimo. ||6||
Katama ca avuso sammasati ?

Idh' avuso bhikkhu kiiye kilyanupassi viharati

jano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.

Yedana vedananupassi

viharati

pe

atapl

atiipl

sampa-

abhijjha-

domanassam.
Citte

citt&nupassi

viharati

pe

atapl

abhijjhado-

manassam.

Dhamme dhammanupassi

viharati atapl sampajano satima

vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.

Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammasati. 7
II

Katama

1|

ca avuso sammiisamadhi ?

Idh' iivuso bhikkhu vivicc' eva kiimehi vivicca akusalehi,

dhammehi

savitakkam

saviciiram

vivekajam

pitisukham

viharati.

pathamajjhjinam upasampajja
Vitakkaviciiranam vupasamii
cetaso

ajjhattam sampasiidanam
ekodibhiivam avitakkam avicJiram samadhijam piti-

sukham dutiyajjhanam upasampajja

viharati.

viriigii upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajano

sukhanca kiiyena patisamvedeti yan tam ariyii acikkhanti

Pitiya ca

upekkhako satima sukhavihiirl

ti

tatiyajjhiinara

upasampajja

viharati.

Sukhassa ca

pahiinil

dukkhassa ca

pahiinji

pubbc ca soma-

nassa-domanassanara atthagamjl addukkham asukham upekkhiisati-parisuddhim catutthajjhanam upasampajja viharati.

^Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammiisamiidhi. 8
II

Idam
saccam.

|j

vuccat' avuso dukkhanirodhagiiminlpatipada ariyaII

10

11

ARUNAVATISUTTA.

133

Tathiigatena iivuso arahatii sammusarabuddhena Biirunasi-

yara Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram

dhammaoakkam

pavatti-

tam appativattiyara samanena vii brahmanena va devena va

Marena vii Brahmunii vu kenaci vii lokasmim acikkhata
desata

patthapata vivarana

pafinapata
ti.
11

kamman

II

vibhajana uttana-

II

Idam avoca ayasma Sariputto attamanii

mato Sariputtassa bhasitam abhinandun ti.

te

bhikkhu ayas-

SACCAVIBHANGA.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me

Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savattbiyam

Tatra kbo
Anatbapindikassa arame.
'
*
*
bbikkbu
amantesi
bhikkbavo
ti
ti.
bbadante
Bhagava
sutam

Jetavane

viharati

Te bbikkbu Bhagavato paccassosum Bbagava etad avoca:

:

II

1|

"

Bbfltapubbam, bbikkbave, raja abosi Arunavii. Rafino

kbo pana bbikkbave Arunavato Arunavati nama rajadbani
abosi.

II

II

Ariinavatiyam kbo pana bbikkbave rujadbanlyam Sikbl

Bbagava Arabam Sammasambuddbo upanissaya vibasi. 3

Sikhissa kbo pana bbikkbave Bbagavato Arabato Sammasambuddbassa Abhibbu Sambbavam nama savakayugam
II

II

abosi

aggam bbaddayugam. ||4||

Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bbagava Arabam Sammasambuddbo Abbibbum bbikkbum amantesi
5
"
Ayama brabmana yena anfiataro brabmaloko ten' upa:

||

1|

safikamissama yiiva bbattassa

Evam
Sikhissa

kiilo bbavissati."

||

1|

kbo

te bbikkbave Abbibbu bhikkhu

Arabato
Sammasambuddhassa paccaBhagavato

bbante

ti

ssosi. 11711

Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bhagavii Arabam Sammasambuddbo Abhibbu ca bhikkhu scyyathapi nama balavu
:

ARUNAVATISUTTA.

134
puriso

baham

vu

samraifljitam

baham

pasaritam

pasiireyya

va

sammifijeyya.
evara Arunavatiya rajadhaniya antarahita tasmim
||

II

Evam

brahmaloke paturahesum.

Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhl Bhagava Araham Samma" Patibhatu

sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum iimantesi
brabmana tam brabmuno ca brahma-parisa ca brabmapari:

sajjanam ca dhamml kathji ti." ||9||

Evam bhante ti kbo bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa

Bhagavato Arahato Sammiisambuddhassa patissutvii brahmanauca brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca dhammiya kathaya

sandassesi samiidapesi samuttejesi sampahamsesi. IllOli
Tatra sudara bhikkhave brahma ca brahmaparisa

brahmaparisajjii ca ujjhayanti khiyanti vipacenti.

Acchariyam vata bho abbhutara vata bho kathauhi

sammukhlbhute savako

satthari

dhammam

ca

nama

desessatiti. ||11||

Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl BhagavJi Araham Sammasambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi
"
Ujjhayanti kho te brahmana brahma ca brahmaparisa ca
acchariyam vata bho abbhutam vata
brahmaparisajjii ca
kathauhi nama satthari sammukhlbhute savako
bho
:

dhammam

desessatiti."

Tena hi tvam brahmana bhiyyo

mattaya brahmaiica

so

brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca saravejehiti.

Evam

kho

||

12

II

Abhibhu bhikkhu
Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva
bhante

ti

dhammam

dissamiinena pi kayena

kayena

dhammam

desesi

bhikkhave

desesi adissamiinena pi
dissamiinena hetthimena upaddha-

kayena, adissamiinena uparimena upaddhakiiyena dhammam

dissamiinena pi uparimena upaddhakiiyena, adissadesesi
miinena hetthimena upaddhakiiyena pi dhammam desesi. ||13||
:

Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahmii ca brahmaparisii ca brahmaca acchariyabbhuta-citta-jiitii ahesum. Acchariyam

piirisajjii
vata bho abbhutam vata bho samanassa mahiddhikata mah&nubhiivatati.

||14||

Atha kho Abhibhil bhikkhQ Sikhira Bhagavantara Arahantam Sammasambuddham etad avoca
:

ARUNAVATISUTTA.

135

"

Abhijanami khv&ham bhante bhikkhusaughassa maj jhe

evariipam viicam bhasita, pahomi khvahara avuso brahraaloke
thito sahassllokadhatura sarena vinnapetun ti. Etassa brahraa-

na kalo yam tvam brahmana brahmaloke thito sahassi-lokadhatum sarenavinuapeyyasiti. ||15||

Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu Sikhissa
Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva brahmaloke thito ima giithayo abhasi
:

Arabhatha, nikkamatha, yufijatha Buddhasiisane

Dhunatha maccuno senaiu nalikeram va kufijaro.

||

1|

Yo imasmim dhammavinaye

appamatto vihassati
dukkhassantam
karissatlti.
Pahaya jatisamsaram

||2||

Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl ca Bhagava Araham Sammasambuddho Abhibhii ca bhikkhu brahmanca brahmaparisaiica
brahmaparisajje ca samvejetva seyyathapi nama balava puriso samminjitaip. va baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham
:

sammifijeyya

evam eva tasmim brahmaloke antarahita

Arii-

||16||

navatiya rajadhaniya paturahesum.

Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhi Bhagava

Araham Sammasam-

buddho bhikkhu amantesi

"Assuttha no tumhe bhikkhave Abhibhussa bhikkhuno
:

brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti." ||17||

"'Assumha kho mayam bhante Abhibhussa bhikkhuno
brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.'" I|18||
" Yatha katham
pana tumhe bhikkhave assuttha Abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanass4
ti."

II

19

II

"*Evam kho mayam

kkhuno brahmaloke
"

bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi-

thitassa

gathayo bhasamanassa

Arabhattha, nikkamatha, yunjatha Buddhasasane

Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram va kufijaro. 1
II

"

Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto

Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam

1|

vihassati

korissati tL

l|2||

DEVADAHASUTTA.

136
"

Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhikkhuno bmhmaloko thitassa gathilyo bhasamanassil ti.'" ||20||
"Siidhu, sildhu, bbikkhave, sadbu kho turahe bhikkhave
*

assuttha Abbibhussa bbikkbuno brahmaloke thitassa giithayo

bhasamanassa

ti.

I|21||

Idam avoca Bhagava

bbasitam abhinandun

attamana

te

bhikkhu Bhagavato

ti. ||22||

ARUNAVATISUTTAM.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Evam me

sutam Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu vihaDevadahan niima Sakyanam nigamo. Tatra kho Bhagava
bhikkhu amantesi
"Naham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhiinam chasa
:

rati

phass&yatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi."

"Na ca panaham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhunam

chasu phassayatanesu nappamjidena karanlyan ti vadiimi."

"Ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahanto khlniisava vusitavanto
katakaraniya ohitabharii anupattasadatthti parikkhlna bhavasamyojana sammad-aililavimutta soham bhikkhiinam chasu
:

phassilyatanesu

"Tarn

kissa

pamajjitum.

nappamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi. 1

hetu?
Katan tesu appamiidena abhabbate
Ye ca kho te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekha
||

1|

appattamiinasii anuttarara yogakkheraam patthayamiinii viharanti ; nes&hara bhikkhave bhikkhiinam chasu phassiiya-

tanesu appamiidena karanlyan ti vadiimi." ||2||

" Tam kIssa hetu ?
Santi bhikkhave cakkhuvinneyyil,
riipii

manoramii pi amanoramii

pi.

Tyassa phussa cittani na

pariyiidiiya titthati cetaso apariyiidiinii

asalllnam upatthitii sati apamuttha

yam

raddho samilhitam cittam ekaggam

araddham

hoti viri-

passaddho kiiyo asaimain khv^ham, bhi-

DEVADAHASUTTA.

137

kkhave, appamadassa phalam samphassa-miino tesam bhikkhilnam chasu phassayatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti
vadami.

||

||

Santi bhikkhave

amanorama

pi.

||

ghanavinfieyya gandha manorama

Santi bhikkhave jivhavinneyya rasa

5
pi.

rama

manorama

pi

amano-

II

il

Santi bhikkhave kayavinneyyii photthabba

6
pi.

amanorama

manorama

pi

||

||

dhamma manorama ama-

Santi bhikhhave manovififieyya

norama

pi

||

pi.

cittam na pariyadaya titthati cetaso

hoti viriyam asalllnam upatthita sati
araddham
apariyadtina
apamuttha passaddho kayo asaraddho samahitam cittam
imam khvaham bhikkhave appamadaphalam
ekaggam
samphassamano tesam bhikkhunam chasu phassayatanesu

Tyassa

phussa

appamadena karanlyan

ti

vadami.

||

1|

Liibha vo bhikkhave suladdhaip vo bhikkhave khano vo

patiladdho brahmacariya vasayati.

Dittha mayii bhikkhave cha phassayataniinika

Tatha

yam

kinci

cakkhunii rupam

nama

niraya.
anittharu-

passati

pan iieva passati neva itthariipam akantarupau iieva passati

no kantarupam amanapariipan neva passati no manaparilpam.
Yam kiuci sotena saddam sunati
pe
.

Yam kiuci gbiinena gandham ghayati

pe
Yam kinci jivhaya rasam sayati
pe
Yam kiiici kayena photthabbam phusati
pe
Yam kiuci manasil dhammara vijanati anittharQpam yeva
.

vijanati,

no ittharupam akantarupam yeva

vijanati,

no kanta-

rupam amanapariipam yeva vijanati no maniiparupara. ||8||

Labha vo, bhikkhave, suladdham vo, bhikkhave, khapo vo,
bhikkhave, patiladdho brahmacariyavasaya.
Dittha maya, bhikkhave, cha-phassiiyatanika nilma saggit.
Tuttha
yam kinci cakkhuna rupam passati ittharupam
:

DEVADAHA8UTTA.

138

yeva passati no anittharnpam

akantam rilpam
rupam.
pe

Yam

kantariipam yeva passati no

manaparilpam yeva passati no amanapa:

manasu dhammam vijiinati ittharupam yeva

no
anittharupam
vijanati,
kantarupam yeva vijanati, no
akantarupam manaparupam yeva vijanati, no amanaparOpam. ||9||
kifici

Liibha vo bhikkhave, suladdham vo bhikkhave, khano vo

patiladdho brahraacariya vasay&ti.
Ruparamii, bhikkhave, devamanussa

riiparatii,

dita

dukkhii

rupaviparinama-viraganirodha

rupasamubhikkhave

devamanussa viharanti.
Saddarama, bhikkhave,

pe

Gandharama, bhikkhave,

pe

Rasarama, bhikkhave,

pe

Photthabbiirama, bhikkhave,

Dhamraaramii,

bhikkhave,

pe

devamanussa

dhammarata

dhammasamudita

dhammaviparinama viraganirodha
kkha, bhikkhave, devamanussa viharanti. I|10||

du-

Tathagato ca kho, bhikkhave, Arahara Sammasambuddho

rupanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadafica adinavaoca

nissarananca yathabhutam viditva na ruparamo, na ruparato
na rupasamudito na rilpaviparijgiama yiriiganirodha sukho
bhikkhave Tathagato viharati.
Saddanam
pe
.

Gandhanam
pe
Kasanam
pe
Photthabbanam

pe

Dhammanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadauca adlnavauca nissaranailca yathabhutam viditva na dhammaramo,

na dhammarato, na dhammasamudito, na dhammaviparinama
:

viraganirodho sukho bhikkhave Tathagato viharatiti.

Idam avoca Bhagavii.

etad avoca sattha
:

Idam vatva

ca Sugato

||11||

athaparam

DEVADAHASUTTA.

Bupu saddu gandha

manapa

Ittha kanta

139

rasa phassa dhamma ca kevala

ca yava tattha ti vuccanti. 1
il

1|

Sadevakassa lokassa ete vo sukhasammata

Yattha ce
tam.

te nirujjhanti tarn

tesam dukkham samma-

II2II

Sukham

tain ditthamariyehi sakkiiyassa nirodhanam

Paccanlkam idam hoti sabbalokena passatam. 3
||

1|

Yam pare sukhato ahu tad ariya ahu dukkhato

Yam pare dukkhato ahu tad ariya sukhato vidu.

||4I|

Passadhammam duvijanam sammulhettha aviddasu

Nivutanam tamo hoti andhakaro apassatam. 5
||

1|

Satanca vivatam hoti aloko passatam iva

Santike na vijananti

maggadhammassa

kovida.

||6||

Bhavaraga-paretebhi bhavayoganusaribhi

Maradheyyanupannebhi nayamdhammosusambuddho. ||7||

Ko nu

aunatram ariyebhi padi sambuddham arahati

parinibbanti auasava ti.

Yam padam sammadaunaya

DEVADAHASUTTAM.

PARITTAM NITTHITAM.

i|

1|

A COLLECTION OF KAMMAVACAS.

NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMASAMBUDDHASSA.

Chap.

I.

THE ORDINATION OF A

PRIEST.

Pathamam upajjham gahapetabbo, upajjham gahapetva

pattacivaram acikkhitabbam
'
" Ama bhante."
*
Ayan te patto ?
:

'

'

" Ama bhante."

Ayam sanghati ?
" Ama bhante."
Ayam uttarasaiigo ?
" Ama bhante."
Ayam antaravasako ?
'

'

'

Gaccha amumhi, okase

Sunatu

me

titthahi

bhante sangho

'
!

Ndgo dyasmato

Tissassa upa-

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, aham Ndgam

sampadapekho.
auusaseyyam.
Sunasi Ndga

ayan te paccakalo bhutakalo. Yam jatam,

santam atthiti vattabbam,
sanghamajjhe pucchante
asantam natthiti vattabbam.
Ma kho vitthiisi ma kho manku ahosi
!

tarn

Evam tam

ti.

pucchissan
Santi te evarupa abadhii ?
*
Kuttham ? ' " Natthi bhante."
*
Gando r " Natthi bhante."
'
*
" Natthi
Kilaso ?

bhante."

*So8o?'

"

Natthi bhante."
" Natthi bhante."
?
'

Apamiiro

UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.

142
*

'

'

'

"

Ama bbante."
Ama bhante."
" Ama bhante."
Bhujisso* si P
"
Ama bhante."
Anano' si P
" Ama bhante."
Na' si rajabhato P
" Ama bhante."
Anuuiiato' si matapituhi ?*
" Ama bhante."
Paripunna-visati- vasso 'si P
" Ama bhante."
Paripunnan te patta-clvaram P'
"
Aham bhante Nago nama."
Kinnamo 'si P'
Manusso'

si P'

"

'

Puriso'

si P

*Ko namo te upajjhayo

Tiasathero nama."

me

Sunatu

"Upajjhayo me bhante aijasmd

P'

bhante

upasampadjipekho.

Ndgo
sangho
Anusittho so maya.
!

Tissassa

di/asmato

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, Ndgo agaccheyya.

Agacchahiti vattabbo
Sangham bhante upasampadam yiicami
bhante sangho, anukampam upadiiya
:

UUumpatu mam

Dutiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami Ullumpatu mam bhante sangho, anukampain upadaya
Tatiyara pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami Ullum:

patu mam

Sunatu

bhante sangho,

me

anukampam upadaya

bhante sangho

ayam Ndgo dyasmato

Tissassa

upasampadjipekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam aham Ndgam

antariiyike dhamme puccheyyam
Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te saccakalo bhiitakiilo. Yam jatam
Santam atthiti vattabbam, asantam uatthiti
tarn pucchami
:

vattabbam.
Santi te evarOpa abadha
'
" Natthi bhante."
'
P
:

Kutthain

'

Gando

Kilaso P

'

" Natthi bhante."

'
" Natthi bhante."
P

'SosoP'
*

" Natthi bhante."

" Natthi bhante."

P'

Apamaro

Manusso'
Puriso'

si

Bhujisso'

Anano'

'

si

P
si P

"

Ama bhante."
Ama bhante."
" Ama bhante.*
" Ama bhante."

"

'

si P

UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.

143

" Ama bhante."

rajabhato ?
*
" Ama bhante."
Anuilimto' si miitapituhi ?
'
" Ama bhante."
*
Paripunna-vlsati-vasso' si ?
'
" Ama bhante."
*
Paripunnan te pattacivarara ?
*

Na*

'

si

'

Kinnumo'

'

Ko namo te

si ?

"

Aham
'

upajjhayo

bhante Ndgo nama."

"
Upaj jhayo me bhante dyasmd

Tismtthero nama."

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

Ayam Ndgo ayasmato

Tissassa

upasampadapekho, parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi, paripunn' assa patta-clvaram Ndgo sangham upasampadam yacati
dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena.
Yadi sanghassa pattakallani sangho Ndgam upasampadeyya
dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena.
Esd Natti :

Sunatu
Tissassa

me

sangho !
Ayam Nago ayasmato
upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dham-

mehi paripunn'

dam

bhante

assa pattaclvaram Niigo

sangham upasampaSangho Niigam.

yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena.

upasampadeti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato

khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena,
Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
80 tunh' assa.
Dutiyam pi etam attham vadami
:

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa

upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi paripunn' assa pattacivarara Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
!

ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena.

Sangho Nagani upasampaayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati

Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh'
Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
assa.
Tatiyam pi etam attham vadami.
deti

Sunatu

me

bhante sangho

ayam Niigo ayasmato Tissassa

upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi paripun^* assa pattaclvaram Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
!

ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagara upasampaayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati
Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh'
assa.
Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
deti

UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.

144

Upasarapanno sarighena Niigo ayasmatii Tissena upajjhiitasmu tunhi evam etain dhurayena khamati saughassa
:

yainiti.

Tiivadeva

chiiyji

metabbii

Utupamiinam iicikkhitabbam
Divasabhjlgo iicikkhitabbo
Sahgiti ucikkbitabba.

Cattiiro nissayii ucikkbitabba

Cattari ca akaranlyani acikkhitabbani

"

Phidiydlopahhojanam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yavaAtirekalilbho

Sangbabhattam,
jlvam ussabo karanlyo.
uddesabbattam, nimantanam, salakabbattam, pakkbikam,
" " Ama bbante " "
uposatbikara, patipadikam."
" Pamsiikulaclvaram
nissdya 2)abbaJ/d : tattha te yava2)
ussabo
Atirekalilbho
khomam, kappiisikaranlyo.
jlvam
" " Ama
kam, koseyyam, kambalara, sanara, bhaiigam."
1)

bhante.""
*'
Rukkhamulasendsanam
3)

nissdya

pahhajjd

tattha

te

Atirekalabho
viharo addha" " Ama bbante " "
hammiyam,
guba."
yogo, pasiido,
"
Putimuttabhesajjam nissdya pahhajjd tattha te yava4)
Atirekalabho
ussabo
Sappi, navanitam,
karanlyo.
jlvam
" " Ama bhante " "
telam, madbu, phanitam."
yavajivain ussabo karanlyo.

"
1)

Upasampannena hhikkhund methimo dhanimo na patisevi-

Yo bhikkhu methunam
iabho antamaso tiracchdnagatdya pi.
dhammam patisevati assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathiipi

niima

nena

jivitura,

Puriso sisacchinno abhabbo tena sarirabandba-

evam eva bhikkhu methunam dhammam patiTan te yavajivam

asakyaputtiyo.

sevitva assamano boti

""
akaranlyani."

Ama

bhante

" "

"

Upasampannena hhikkhund adinnam theyyasahkhdtam

na addtahham antamaso tinasaldkam updddya, Yo bhikkhu
pjidam vii padarabam vii atirekapjidam va adinnam theyya2)

sahkhatam

adiyati,

assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathlipi

nama Pandupaliiso bandhana pamutto abhabbo haritattSya

evam eva bhikkhu padam va padarabam va atirekapadam va
:

TICIVARENA AVIPPAVASA.
adinnam theyyasankhutam

Tan
puttiyo.
bhante!""
"
3)

te

145

adiyitva, assamano hoti asakya-

yavajlvam

Upasampannena hhikkhuna

sanclcca pdnojlvitcL

petabbo antamaso

"

**

akaranlyam."

Ama

na voro-

Yo bhikkhu

kHnthakipillikam updddya
raanussaviggaham jlvitii voropeti antamaso gabbhapatanam upadiiya assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo, Seyyathapi
nama puthu sila dvedha bhinna appatisandhika hoti, evam eva
bhikkhu sancicca manussaviggaham jivita voropetva assamano
sailcicca

hoti, asakyaputtiyo.

Tan

te

yavajlvam akaranlyam."

" "Ama

bhante.""
"

Upasampannena bhikkhund uttari-manussa-dhammo na

Yo bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam uUapati jhanara va vimokkharn va samadhim va samapattim vji maggam va phalara va assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo.
Seyyathapi nama talo matthaka chinno, abhabbo puna virulhaya evam eva bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam
abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam ullapitva, assamano hoti
4)

uUapitabbo antamaso simndgdre abhirdmiti.

asakyaputtiyo.

Tan

te

yavajlvam akaranlyam."

""

Ama

bhante.""

Chap.

II.

THE INVESTITURE OF A PRIEST WITH THE

THREE ROBES.
me

bhante sangho. Yo so sanghena ticivarena

sammato.
Yadi sahghassa pattakallara sangho
avippavaso
tarn ticivarena avippavasam
samuhaneyya.

Sunatu

Esd

natti

me

bhante sangho
Yo so sanghena ticivarena
tam
ticivarena avippavasam
avippavaso sammato, sangho
samuhanati. Yass4yasmato khamati etassa ticivarena avippa-

Sunatu

10

XJPOSATHA KAMMAVACA.

146

Yassa na kkhamati so

vasassa samugghato, so tunh* assa.

bhasej'ya.

Samiihato so sanghena ticlvarena

Kliamati sahghassa tasmii

tui'ibl

avippaviiso.

evam etam dbarayamiti.

Chap. III.

THE FIXING OF A BOUNDAUY FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE UPOSATHA.

me bhante sangbo
Yii sa sangbena sima sammasamiinasamvasa ek' uposatba
yadi sangbassa pattakallam sangbo tam simam samuhaneyya.
SunJitu

nnitii

Esd mtti:
Suniltu rae bbante sangbo

yii

sangbena sTma sarama-

sa

nnita samanasamvasii ek' uposathii, sangbo tam sImam samiibanati.

Yassayasmato kbamati

simaya samanasamva-

etissii

Yassa na
ek' uposatbaya samuggbato so tunb' assa.
kkbamati, so bbiiseyya. Samubatii sa slmii sangbena samanasjiya

saraviisa ek' uposathii.

etam
*

Kbamati sangbassa

dhiirayiimiti.

Purattbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara

Eso

piisiino

anudisiiya

kin

nimittam

piisiino

nimittam

'

" Pasiino

Dakkhiniij^a disiiya kin nimittara ?

Eso

'

" Piisiino bbante "

bbante!"
Eso piisiino nimittam

evam

'

nimittam

Purattbimiiya

?'

tasmii tunbl

"

Piisiino

bbante

"
!

'
!

Dukkbiniiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?' "Piisiino bbante!"

Eso piisiino nimittam
*
" Pasiino bbante "
Paccbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara ?'
*
Eso piisiino nimittam
*

'

*
*

Paccbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam

Eso piisiino nimittam

?'

"Piisiino bbante !"

'

'

Uttariiya disiiya kin nimittara ?'

Eso

piisiino

nimittam

'
!

*'

Piisiino

bbante

"
!

KATHINA KAMMAVACA.
'TJttariiya anudisiiya kin

"

nimittam?*

147

Pasano bhante

!'*

'

Eso pasano nimittam

SunJitu me bhante sangho
!

kittitii

YuvatJi samanta

simam sammanneyya samuna-samvasam

JEsd

nimitta

yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho etehi nimittehi

mtti

ek' uposatham.

Suniitu me bhante sangho

Yavata samanta nimitta kittita
sangho etehi nimittehi sImam sammannati samanasamvasam
ek' uposatham.
Yassayasmato khamati etehi nimittehi slsammuti
raaya
samana-samvasaya ek' uposathjiya, so tunh'
assa
Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya
Sammata sa sima
etehi
nimittehi
samanasamviisa
ek'
sanghena
uposatha. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
!

Sunatu me bhante sangho

Ya sa sanghena sammata saYadi sanghassa pattakallam
manasamvasa ek' uposatha
sangho tam sImam ticivarena avippavasam sammaneyya thapetva gamanca gamupacaranca.
End fiatti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho Ya sa sanghena sIma sammata
samanasamvasa ek' uposatha sangho tam sImam ticivarena
avippavasam sammannati thapetva gamanca gamupacaraiica.
Yassayasmato khamati etissa simaya ticivarena avippavasaya sammuti thapetva gamanca gamupacarafica, so tunh*
assa
yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
!

Sammata

sa sIma

sanghena ticivarena avippavasii thapetva

Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi

gamanca gamupacaranca.
evam etam dharayamiti.

Chap. IV.

THE BESTOWMENT OF THE KAJHINA ROBE.

Sunatu me bhante sangho
Idam sanghassa kathinadussam uppannain.
Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, sangho
imam kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno dadoyya
kathinam attharitum.
!

KATHINA KAMMAVACA.

148

JEsd mtiL
Sunatu me bhante sangho
Idam sanghassa kathinadussam uppannam. Sangho imam kuthinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno deli kuthinam attharitum. Yass&yasmato
khamati iraassa kathinadussassa itthannamassa bhikkhuno
dilnam kathinam attharitum so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati 80 bhaseyj'a. Dinnam idam sahghena kathinadussam
itthannamassa bhikkhuno kathinam attharitum.
Khamati
tasma
etam
evam
tunhi,
sanghassa,
dharayamlti.
!

Kathinadayakassa vattham atthi sace so tarn ajananto

" Bhante katham kathinam djitabban ti ? "
pucchati
:

" "

Tassa evam acikkhitabbam

Tinnam civaranam ailfiatara-pahonakam suriyuggamana-samaye vattham kathinacl:

varam demii

ti diitum vattatiti
" " Attharakena bhikkhuna

kamo

attharitu

sace

sanghatiya

kathinam

paccuddharitabba
nava sanghati adhitthatabba, "imiiya sanghatiya kathinain
Tena kathinattharakena
attharamiti," vaca bhinditabbii.
hoti,

poranika sahghjiti

bhikkhuna sahgham upasahkamitva ekamsam uttarasangam

karitva afijalim paggahetva evam assa vacanlyo
"
Atthatara, bhante, sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi"
nattharo, anumodatha
" " Atthatam avuso
sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi:

nattharo

anumodama

ti

""

me bhante sangho
kathinam
sangho
uddhareyya.
SunJitu

Ead

hatii

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam

Yadi sanghassa pattakallam

Sunatu me bhante sangho
sangho kathinam uddharati. Yassayasmato khamati kathinassa ubbharo so tunh' assa
yassa na kkhamati, so bha!

seyya.

Ubbhatam sahghena kathinam

tunbi evam etam dharayamiti.

Khamati sanghassa tasma

THERA-SAMMUTI-NAMASAMMUTTI.

149

Chap. V.

THE ELECTION OF A
Aham
soham,

PRIEST.

bhante itthannamam

thera-sammutim iccharai
itthannamam therasammutirn

bhante,

sangham
Dutiyam pi yacapetva, tatiyam pi yacapetva
byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sarigho iiapetabbo
Sunatu me bhante sangho
ayam itthannatno bhikkha
sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthan!

yacarai

namam
Esd

therasammutirn dadeyya.

natti

me

bhante sangho
Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu
sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati, sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutirn deti. YasslLyasmato khamati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam
therasammutiya danam, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati
so bhaseyya.
Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno
itthannamam therasammuti khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi
evam etam dharayamiti.

Sunatu

Chap. YI.

THE GIYING OF A NAME TO A PRIEST.

Aham bhante itthannamam namasammutim icehami, soham
bhante

sangham

itthannamam namasammutim

yacamiti.

Dutiyam pi yacapetva tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sangho napetabbo

Sunatu me bhante sangho
Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu
sangham itthannamam namasammutim j'acati. Yadi sanghassa
pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthanoamam
:

namasammutim dadeyya.
End

natti

VIHARA KAMMAVACA.

150

Sunatu

me bhante sangho

A^-am itthannamo bbikkhu

itthannamam namasamrautim yacati
sahgbo
itthannamassa bhikkbuno ittbanniimam namasammutim deti.
Yassfiyaamato khamati ittbannamassa bliikkbuno ittbannamam niima sammutiya danam so tunb' asaa Yassa na kkba!

sangbam

mati so bhiiseyya.

Dinna sahgbena ittbannamassa bbikkbuno ittbanniimam

nilmasammuti Kbamati sangbassa tasma tui^bi evam etam
:

dbiirayamiti.

Evam kammavacam
databbo

katva byattena bbikkbuna patibalena

ti.

Chap. VII.

THE DEDICATION OF A YIHARA.

Sunatu me bbante sangbo
Yadi sangbassa pattakallara
sahgbo ittbannamam vibaram kappiyabbumim sammanneyya.
;

Esd

natti

me

Sangbo ittbannamam vibaYass&yasmato kbamati

ittbannamassa vibarassa kappiya bbumiyii sammuti so tunb*
assa Yassa na kkbamati so bbaseyya.
Sammato sahgbena
itthannamo vibiiro kappiyabbumi. Kbamati sangbassa tasma
tunbi evam etam dbiirayamiti.
Sunatu

bbante sangbo

ram kappiyabbumim sammannati.

:

HANDBOOK OF
III.

GLOSSARY.

PALI.

GLOSSARY.
ajjhattarh (adv.), relating to the in-

A, aud before vowels AN, a negative

particle

used only in composi-

dividual.

ajjhattiko (adj.), internal, belonging

to the individual.

tion.

AMSO, a part, a period of time.

AMSO, AMSAM, shoulder.
a-kattho

not ploughed.

(adj.),

AJJHAYAKO,
ANJALI (m.),

a preceptor.
the hollow of the

joined hands.

a-kano, rice freed from the red coat-

annataro, one, a certain.

ing which underlies the husks.

a-kanto (adj.), unpleasant, disagree-

ANNA (f.) knowledge.

able.

anhatra (adv.), otherwise, with the

exception

tt-kaliko (adj.), without delay (epi-

thet of the

a-kuppo

dhamma), immediate.

(adj.),

firm, immoveable.

a-kusalo (adj.), had, evil, sinful.

a-kkuddho (adj.), not violent.

of.

ANNO, other.
ATTO, a case,

a cause.

ATTHA (num.), eight.

atthahgiko

(adj.), eightfold.

atthamo, eighth.

akkha-dhutto, gambler.
akkhata (m.), one who tells.

ATTHI

a-kkhati, to

tell.

ATTHI'^"NJA

AKKHO,
AGGAM,

die.

ATTHO,

AGGI

point, top, extremity.

(m.),

AGGO

limb

AJJA

ATI

marrow.

t.),

large hall.

(adj.), very small.

the sea, the ocean.

(adv. and

prep.), over, beyond,

exceeding, before vowels ace.

to

come

(f.),

reason.

ANNAVO,

foremost.

share, quality, at-

tribute.

acceti,

bone; caus. atthiyati,

APPHAYOGO (t.
anuko

fire.

(adj.), first,

ANGAM,

(n.),

to treat as a bone.

pass beyond,

to

over-

p. p. p. atito, past.

(adv.),

now, to-day.

ajjatagge, henceforward

AJJHAITAM,

individual thought.

ati-go (adj.), escaping from.

[gant.
ati-mannati, to despise, to be arro-

ati-mant

(adj.),

proud.

ATIREKALABHO
allowance.

(t.

t.),

extra

GLOSSARY.

151

ATTA

(n.), self,

sion, see

A'lTHA

mind

(for declen-

an-arahd, not being a saint.

Grammar).

(adv.), here.

ATTIIAM

[arice.

(Skr. tuta), disappear-

att/ia-gamo, atthan, disappearance,

annihilation.

an-ariyo, ignoble.

anavajjata

(f.),

blamelessness.

anavajjo (adj.), blameless.

an-avayho

a-ttharati, to spread out.

not to be given in

(adj.),

marriage.

atthdya (adv.), for the good of.

AT'l'HI, to he (for conjugation, see

an-avaseso, without remainder.

an-avilo, clear from.

andkulo, untroubled.

Grammar).

ATTHO, reason, desire property.

ATHA, ATHO (adv.), and hut.
;

a-thuso

an-abhirati, dissatisfaction.

(adj.), free

is

not

given.

ADDHANAM, a road

ADHAMO (adj.),

a long time.

lowest.

[less.

andlayo, free from desire, passion-

A-NICCO

from husk.

a-dlnnaddnaih, taking what

andgato, future, coming.

(adj.)

(t. t.),

perishable,

not lasting.
anittho (adj.), unpleasant.

ANU

(adv.

and

prep.), after, later

AD HI (adv. and prep.), above, over;

anu-kat/^ati, to recite.

frequently in composition before

anu-kampako, compassionate.

vowels ajjh.

anu-kampl, compassionate.

adhi-titthati, to devote oneself.

anu-jdndti, to permit

aor. ajjha-

anu-tthitati, to

an-uttaro

blidsi.

adhi-vdsanam, the assent,

to

anuh-

(adj.),

make

to follow.

than which none

is

higher, the highest.

adhi-vahanath, carrying.

adhi-vdseti (cans.),

p. p. p.

ati'Utthdnam, want of energy.

(m.), lord, chief.

adhi-bhdsati, to address

nato.

adhi-tthanam, resting-place.

ADHI-PATI

along, again, in consequence.

[accept.

consent, to

anudisd,

(f.),

an intermediate point

of the compass.

a-nano, free from debt.

an-up-pagacchati, not to embrace.

an-attd (m.), not a

anu-para-yati, to walk round and

an-atto

(adj.),

self.

without

individu-

an-attha-samhito, profitless.

plating.

an-anu-giddho, without greediness.

un-anu-s8uto

round.
anu-passi (adj.), looking at, contem-

ality, unreal.

(adj.),

unheard

anu-pubbaso

(adv.), in regular order.

anuppanno, not arisen.

of.

an-anto, without end, innumerable.

an-uppddo, not arising.

ANA-BHAVO,

anu-ydti, to follow.

bhdvarh

non-existence; ana-

gacchatl,

nothing, to perish.

to

come

to

anu-yogo, being addicted

anu-rakkhati, to protect.

to.

GL088ART.

ANU-8AY0
anusari

repentance.

(t. t.),

(adj.), fullowing;.

156

APf, PI

(part.), also, even.

a-pUuno

(adj.),

not calumnious.

anu-gdsati, to teach.

ap-eti, to

anu-ssarati, to call in mind.

appa-kicco, having few cares.

anu-asaveti (cans.), to cause to be

a-pjHigabbho, not arrogant.

heard, to proclaim.
an-ejo (adj.), free

(adv.

appa-nigghoso, free from noise.

a-ppa-matto, vigilant, careful.

O'ppamdno

mesentery.

(adj.), infinite.

a-ppo'Ttiddo, vigilance, zeal.

and

prep.), within,

appa-saddo, free from noise.

a-ppu-tanno, dissatisfied.

between, among.

a-ppiyo, not dear, hateful.

antara-dhanam, disappearance.
antara-dhayati, to vanish, to hide

APPO

weak

small,

(adj.),

p. p. p. antarahito, vanished.

quently in composition.

antardyiko, causing an obstacle.

abbh-ug-gacchati, to reach.

ANTARA- VASAKO

A-BY-APADO (t.t.), absence

(t. t.),

garment worn by

under-

Buddhist

ANTALIKKHAM,

ANTO

sky, air.

last, final.

(adv.

inside

a-bhabbatd
a-bhabbo

priest.

ANTIMO,

and

prep.), within, in,

see also antara,

ANTO (also neuter), end,

ANDHO (adj.), blind.

(f.),

fre-

[sire.

of de-

non-liability.

(adj.), incapable.

a-bhayam, safety from danger.

ABHI (adv. and prep.), exceeding;
in, into.

abhi-kkanto, handsome, beautiful.

limit.

abhl-kkanto

(p. p. p.),

abhikkamati,

advanced.

andha-koro, darkness.

abhi-kkamati, to step forward.

ANNAM, food.
APAMARO, epilepsy.

abhi-gtto, (p. p. p.), recited.

a-pamuttho

(adj.),

not

abhi-kkamo, advancing.
left

behind.

(adj.),

immense, unde-

a-pariydddnarh, not taking up, not

laying hold of.
(adj.), other,

subsequent;

western.

a-pddako, having no

APAYO

(f.),

g^r. abhinnd.

covetousness.

abhi-t'ttthati, to surpass.

ABHITTHANAM

fined.

APARO

know

nbhijdndti, to

ABHIJJHA

a-pardjito, unconquered.

a-parimdno

be

united.

antamaso, even.

ANTARA

cannot

that

a-ppati-sandiko,

from desire.

an-ottapi (adj.), fearless of sinning.

the intestines, bowels.

ANTAM,
ANTAGUNAM,

go away.

d'adly

(t.

t.),

ABHINHAM

(adv.), repeatedly.

abhinhato (adv.), repeatedly, [with.

ab/ii-nandati, to rejoice, to

feet.

[going away],

hell.

crime,

sin.

ABHINIBBATTI

(f.)

l>e

pleased

(t.t.),

birth ia another existence.

re-

IM

GLOSSARY.
avecca, gerund, of ava

abhi-niveno, adhering to.

guard, to keep.

abhi-paleti, to

abhi-ppa-modayam,

yj

i,

penetrate.

a-anto

abhi-rudo, cooing, singing.

a-ammoho

mount.

not good, wicked.

(adj.),

without infatua-

(adj.),

tion.

abhi-vastati, to cause to rain.

a-sallino, not cowering, resolute.

abhi-vadeti, caus. of abhivadati, to

ASlTI

ASU

salute.

ah/ii-sameti, to penetrate.

(adj.),

a-inanapo

a-$ubho

uupleasing,

un-

a-manoramo

(adj.),

(adj.),

ASURO,

a-mitto, enemy.

ASNATI,

asiddo, tasting

forest.

(m.), a vener-

(adj.),

(adj.),

honourable, vener-

able, noble.

ARIYA-SACCAM

to eat.
;

(t. t.),

every.

[ness.

enjoyment, happi-

horse.

AHAM (pron.),

worth.

all,

a-ssasati, to inhale air.

ASSO,

able person.

from sorrow.

ARANNAM,

ARIYO

bad.

an asura.

a-so/co, free

unpleasant.

ARAHA ARAHAM

Gram-

(loc.), here.

a-aeso (adj.), without rest

pleasant.

ARAHO

that (see

tliis,

amumhi

a-suci (adj.), unclean.

immortal.

(adj.),

(num.), eighty.

(pron.),

mar)

a-bhojaneyyo, not to be eaten.

a-mato

to

a-veram, fricudliuess.

rejoicing.

abhi-ramati, to delight.

abhi-ruhati, to

I (see

Grammar).

AH I (m.), a snake.
AHO (interjection).

sublime

truth.

ALAM (adv.),
ALASO

ALOKO,

a-kapjM, ornament, disguise.

be attached, to adhere.

(adj.),

being

addicted,

ad-

hering.

AVA
off;

until, as far as.

a-kankhati, to desire.

intuition.

alliyati, to

alltko

A (prep.),

sufficient.

(adj.), idle.

d-gacchatiy to come.
a-cikkhati, to

tell,

and

and

(prep,

adv.), away,

down.

ava-ruddho

ajahno
d-jtvo,

ava-jdndti, to despise.
(adj.),

obstructed.

(adj.),

announce, to

of noble birth, [hood.

means of liveli-

livelihood,

ATAPO, sunshine.
ATAPI (adj.), ardent,

a-viddasu, ignorant.

a-ddti, to take

a-vippavato, not parting.

ADICCO,

a-vi-rufho (adj.), not grown.

AdINAVO,

a-vivayho
avihimaa

to

investigate.

(adj.),

(f.),

not marriageable.

mercy, humanity.

zealous.

pass, ddiyati.

the sun.
distress,

suffering

evil result.

dnantariko (adj.), uninterrupted.

W7

0L08SART.

AxAPAXAIVr
exhaled

t.),

(t.

inlniled

and

ANISAMSO,

AhARO,
a-huti

lireath.

offering.

ahuneyyo

advjintage, profit.

aiiub/iavava(At\j.), possessing

food.

(f.),

power.

shipful,

wor-

sacrificial,

(adj.),

worthy of

offerings.

anu-bhavo, power, dignity.

home.

a-net't, to I)ring

apadeta (m.), inflioter, causer.

abadhiko (adj.), affected with illness.

ABADHO,

illness.

a-b/iujati, to

AMA

bend, to turn.

INGHA

INAM,

(interj.), yes, truly.

pray

ITTHO

A YATANAM (t.

ITI,

TI

lust.

be shaken.

debt.

a-manteti, to address.

[sphere.
t.), organs of sense ;

come

(interj.),

ICCHATI. to wish.
ICCHA, wish, desire,
INJATI, to move, to

[sant.

(adj.), desired,

good, plea-

(conj.), thus.

a-t/atiko, future.

ITTHATTAM,

AYASMA,

itthan-namo, having such and such

a name, thus named.

AYASO,

AYU

old, venerable.

despair.

ITTH I

(n.), life.

a-yuto

endowed with.

(adj.),

a-raddho

see

(p. p. p. to aradhaii), ac-

complished.
a-rahhati,

to

begin,

to exert oneself;

to

attempt,

ger. arabbha

araddho.

p. p. p.

AR AMO, pleasure, pleasure-garden.

a-ruhati, to ascend.

present condition.

woman

(f.),

(for declension,

Grammar).

IDDHI

(f.)

t.),

(t.

supernatural

power.
iddhiko (adj.), possessed of iddhi
(supernatural power).
iddhimd, possessed of supernatural

power.

IDHA

a-varanam, covering.

(adv.), here, hither.

[gwte.
indakhllo, pillar in front of a city

avaso, abode.

INDO,

avahati, to convey.

INDRIYO

AVI

ISI, a priest

(adv.), manifestly, in full view

(see

Grammar).

king, chief.
(t. t.),

faculty.

maheai (idem).
iaaariyam, dominion.
;

a-Duati, to enter, to approach.

ISSARO,

AVUSO

ISSA, jealousy, envy,

(voc. to ai/asmd), friend!

asanam, a

A-SAVO
human

master, chief.

seat.
(t.

I.

t), literally influence;

passion

khtnasavo, one in

Is A, pole of a plough.

whom human passiou is extinct.

ASEVi (adj.), addicted to.
Aha, to 8|ieak (see (jrammar).

uk-kujjeti, to set

ahanati, to strike.

Hg-gacchati, to

U.

up again.

rise.

GLOSSARY.

158
ug-gafihati, to rise, to

lift

np, to

ug-gamanath,

UPAJJHO,

rise.

UGGO,

violent.

UCCA

(indecl.),

preceptor.

upa-tthanam, attendance.
as Jirst

compounds high
high

upa-jwati, to subsist by.

upajj hdpeti, to command.

learn.

part qf

uccdsayanath,

upa-tthito (p. p.p.), ready, present.

upaddho,

half, partial.

upa-dissati, to be seen, discovered.

seat.

UC-CARO,

excrement.

UJU (adj.),

straight.

UPADHI

(t.

a substratum of

t.),

being.

uj-jhayati, to be irritated, annoyed.

upandmfiti (cans.), to

u-tthahati, to rise, to stand up, to

UPA-NAHl

exert oneself; p. p. p. vutthito.

UNNA-NABHI
UNHAM, heat.

UNHO

upa-ni-pajjati, to

f.

n.),

upa-pajjati, to

season.

ut-

highest,

(superl.),

tlie upper yellow garment of a Buddhist priest.

UTTARO (adj.), higiier;

clear,

supine

easy

open, evident,

adv.

northern.

uttdni

and

uttdnd, clearly.

away

proach.

upa-samo, quietude, calm.

UPASAMPADA (f.)
sampada

the upa-

(t. t.),

ordination.
for ordi-

UPADANAftl

(t.

t.),

clinging to
;

okhandhdf

and prep

anukam-

UPAYO, means of success.

UPASAKO, fem. UPASIKA (t.

),

to

lift

near

up.
to

less.

UPEKHA

t.),

gamupacdro,

the approach to a village.

(f.),

indifference, equa-

nimity.

npekkhako,
;

a lay devotee.

ud-dharati, to draw out

below,

to ap-

to,

updydso, despair.

upwards.

upa-cdro, approach

upa-san-kamati, to go

path updddya, taking pity.

come up.

(adv.

uppermost.

upd-diyati, to take hold

uddneti (cans.), to breathe forth.

UPA

(adj.),

element of being.

udariyam, stomach.
UDANAM, solemn utterance.

UDDHAM,

uparimo

upa-vadati, to blame.

existence, attachment

outside, out.

UDAKAM, water.
UDARAM, belly.

ud-eti, to

to, to attain.

nation.

(prep., only used in composi-

tion), above,

come

upasampaddpekho, wishing

ut-trasati, to tremble.

UD

to.

upamo, highest.

[most.

UTTARA-SANGO,

UTTANO,

down.

lie

upa-nisso, residing in.

mighty, great.

(adj.),

UTU (m.
UTTAMO

offer.

bearing hatred.

upanissdya, near, close

(m.), spider.

(adj.), hot.

UIjARO

(adj.),

resigfned, patient.

up-eti, to go, to

approach

pd^u-

peto, living, possessed of breath.

OLOSSART.

UPOSATHIKAlCf

(t.

food

t.),

offered on full-moon days.

UPOSATHO

(t.

t.),

159

o-pildpeti, to let float.

o-bhasati, to shine.

the Buddhist

o-bhaso, light.

o-hito (p. p. p.), put

Sabbnth-day.

down, deposited.

vp-pajjati, to arise.

K.

p. p. p. to uppajati.

uppanno,

UBBHARO=UDDHARO

(t. t.),

KAIVfSO, metal, bronze.

ul-lapati, to lay claim to, to assert.

KANKHATI, to doubt.
KACCHURO, scab.

ul-lumpati, to

KATHINAM

rooting up.

lift

up.

(t.

a robe made

t.),

ul-loketi, to look up.

for

ussaho, exertion.

day, out of the rough material.

a Buddhist priest

K AT HI NO
E.

(adj.),

KANDU

(f.),

in a single

hard, solid.

itch.

calm, tranquil.

KANNO,

ear.

eha-cco (adj.), one, a certain.

KANHO

(adj.),

eka-m-antam

katapuhnatd, meritorlousness.

ekaggo

(adj.),

(adv.), on one
(num.), one ; alone.

side.

EKO
EKO (adj.), single, solitary.
EKODIBHAVO (t. t.), unity,

per-

black, sinful.

KATAMO (pron.), what ?

KATHAM (adv.), how.
KATHA
discourse.

which

(f.),

haps 'predominance.'
etarahi (adv.), now.

kad-ariyo, a bad man.

etadiso, such like.

KAPPASIKAM, cotton.
KAPPIYO (adj.), fit, right, proper;

to go, to enter (with ace).

ETI,

EVA and EVAM (adv.), thus.

ESANA (f.), wish, desire.
ESl

(adj.),

seeking, desiring.

ehi-passiko (adj.), inviting (epithet

of the

dhamma).

KANTO

(a(^j.),

kappiyabhumi, a suitable

KAPPETI

o-kaso,

room, place.

O'kkanti

OGHO,

({.),

descent.

flood, torrent.

leading to perfection
(epithet of the dhamma).

opanayiko,

arrange.

KAPPO, time;
the whole

rule; ordinance; all,

kevalakappo, whole.
to shake.

KAMBAKAM, woollen garment.

KAMMAM, doing, action.
kammanta

(f.),

kammanto,

calling.

conduct

kamma-vipako, result of actions.

kamyata

ODATO,

KARAI^AM, making.
KARlSAM, excrement.

white, pure.

occupntiuu,

work,

otthdvo (adj.), steady.

opako, without result.

site.

(cans.), to enter upon, to

KAMPATI,
O.

loved, agreeable.

({.),

desire.

GLOSSARY.

100

KARUIVA.

(f.),

KAROTI,

to

compassion.

make

piiy attention

to

mantuikaroti,

die

to

kalaiikaroti,

Grammar);

(see

anjalim

KALEBARAM, a corpse.
K AS ATI, to plough.

desire

lust, pasgion.

(f.),

KO

part.

KASO, a cough.
-KIM (adv.), why, pray?

(m.)

[complished.
one who is ac-

(t.t.),

whole, entire.

pron.),

(inter,

who ? which

Grammar).

(see

KODHO,

anger.

KOPlNAM,

pudenda.

it

silken stuff.

right.

KH.

KHANO, moment

what.

measure

(brief

of time).

khandiccam,

KINCIKKHAM,

KHATTIYO,

trifle.

KITTAYATI, kitteti,
KITTI (f.), fame.
KIPILLIKO, an

KILAMATHO,

to proclaim.

ant.

[tion.
fatigue, mortifica-

KiRAM, meat.
KlVA (adv.), how?

KUKUCCAM, misconduct.
KUKUTTHAKO, Phasiunus
a bird.

KUCCHI(f.),

belly.

elephant.

KUTTHAM, leprosy.
KUNTHO, an ant.
KUMARO, hoy.
girl.

state of

being broken.

warrior.

KHANTi (f.), patience.

KHANDO, the shoulders

1. 1.

ele-

ment of being.

KHAMATI, to

endure

to forgive

to be approved.

scab, dry leprosy.

skilful.

(t. t.),

(adj.),

kihci[d), anything, whatsoever.

((.),

a crab.

KOSEYYAM,

khhsu, what.

kumari

kovido, knowing, acquainted with.

time; kalena, in due time;

KU^JARO,

family

KOST.A, heron.

death.

kdlam mahhati, he deems

lus,

family.

noble

koci, whosoever.

bhattakalo, meal-time.

KILASO,

of

hair.

what ?

KARl (adj.), doing, acting.

KARO, making, constituent
KALO,

KULlRAKO,

KESO,

(adj.), bodily, physical.

kalakiriyd

high

herd

caste.

KEVALO

ploughing.

kayiko

kulaputto,

son

KEVALl

kassako, a ploughman.

KAMO, wish,
KAYO, body.

flock,

KUSALO (adj.)
KCLAM, rag.

karoti, to salute respectfully.

kasi,

KULAIVI,

KHAYO,
KHARO,

KHASA
gal-

extinction, vanishing.

solid; harsh.
(f.),

scab.

KHIPATI, to throw.
KHIYATI, to decrease,
away;

to

KHILO,

to

waste

p. p. p. khijio.

a pin, a stake.

KHUDDO
KHURO,

murmur;

(adj.),

mean.

hoof of a horse or ox.

KHELO, saliva, phlegm.

KHETTAld, land, district.

161

GLOSSARY.

KHEMAI!^,

safety,

well-being

KHEMO,

KHEMi

fern.

GUHA

(adj.),

GO

(m.

rock-cave.

(f.),

GEDHO,

yogakkhemam, nibbana.

greediness.
ox,

f.),

KHO (inter).), indeed.

KHOMAM, linen.

GOPATI,

to

GANH ATI, to take, to seize

p. p. p.

bind.

GABBHARO, a cleft.
GABBHO, womb, belly.
GAMBHiRO (adj.), deep.
accessible.

blame.

(f.),

parent, teacher.

GHARO,

nose.

GHAYATI,

to

village.

^ara^Ao (adj.), blameable; contemptible.

CA

(conj.), and, also.

CAKKHU

(n.), eye, insight.

cakkhumd

reverence.

gavi, cow.

GIMHO,
GIRA,

hot season.

voice, speech.

GIRI, mountain.

GILATI,

to devour.

GILANO

(adj.), sick, iU.

OITAM,

singing, a song.

GUTTI (f.), guarding.

GUMBO, a bush, a thicket.

eyes,

CANDO (adj.), wrathful, passionate.

fourth

catutthath,

for

the fourth time.

the

cardinal

four

points.

catup-pado, having four

CATTARO

(num.),

feet.

cataio

four;

cattari (n.).

CARANAM,
CARATI,
CAVATI,

heat.

GIMHANAM,

having

(adj.),

having insight,

((.),

GARAVO,

smeU.
C.

catud-disam,

stanza.

house.

GATHA,

(adj.), leading.

of

life

householder.

catuttho,

GAMO,

guard;

GHARAIVI, house.

garu-karo, respect.
GAHATTHO, a householder.

gamini

to

protect,

gharamen, leading the

GHANAM,

gahito.

GARAHA
GARU (m.),

Grammar).

GH.

GACCHATI, to go (see Grammar).

GANG, multitude.
GANDO, goitre.

GANTHETI, to tie, to
GANDO, smell, odour.

(see

lineage.

p. p. p. gutto, cp. kayagutto.

G.

gammo,

cow

GOTTAlVr, famUy,

secure.

good conduct.

to go.
to

disappear

p. p. p.

cuto.

CAVANAlfl, disappearance,

CAGO,

liberality,

death.

self-sacrifice

abandoning.

CICCITAYATI,
CITTAM, mind.

to splash.

cittako (adj.), mindful.

CINTETI,

to think.
11

162

6I.088ART.

CiVARAM,
CUTI,

JIVHA (f.),
JlRANAM,

robe.

disappearing, death.

cetasiko (adj.), mental.

JlRATI,

tongue.

growing old; decay.

to g-r()w ohl.

ceto-vimutti, emancipation of mind.

JiVIKA (f.), livelihood,

JIVITAM, life.

CORO,

JIVI

CETO,

mind.

tliief.

(adj.), living.

JUTI
CH.

CHA (num.),

JO,
'

CHATTHO, sixtli.
CHAPPETI, to tlirow

splendour

(f.),

sesf^ed

six.

life.

jutima, po8-

with splendour.
part of a compound

at last

arising from.'

away, to

JH.

renounce.

CHANDO, wish, resolve, intention.

CHAMBHATI, to be alarmed.
CHAMBHITATTAM, trembling.

JHANAM

CHAYA

SATTI (f.), announcement, declara-

(f.),

CHINDATI,

shadow.
to cut off.

tion,

meditation.

formula.

^ANAM,
J.

(t. t.),

knowledge.

]SATAK0, a

relative.

Janapado, a country.

5^ATI, kinsman.

janeti (caus. jay at i), to bring forth,

NAYO,

right method.

to produce.

p.

JANETTI, a mother.
JANO, man, person, being.

DAMSO,

JARA

PASATf,

(f.),

old age, decay.

JARO,
JALATI, to bum.
JAHATf, to leave

PAHO,

fever.

JATARCPAM,
JATI

(f.),

JATU

XHANl

gold.

JIOHACCHA
jinnako

having

(adj.),

[duced.

bom,

(adj.), old.

having

breasts

THANAM,

standing.

thanaso (adv.), causally, necessarily.

THITI

(f.),

durability;

life.

to be pro-

T.

to dislike.

(f.),

breasts

like a tinduka fruit.

know.

JAY ATI, to be
JALA (f.), flame.

p. p. p. dattho.

burning.

timbarutthani,

Jato (p. p. p.), lomahatthajato, the

hair standing on end terrified.

JIGUCCHATI,

TH.

birth.

to

to bite

behind.

(adv.), verily.

JANATI,

a gad-fly.

hunger.

TAOGHA
TACO,

(adv.), verily.

skin.

TANDULO,

rice

ready for boiling.

163

GLOSSARY.

TANHA

lust,

(f.),

maha-

desire;

tatiyo,

third

the

for

tatlyam,

third time.

TATRA

oflfe

TAPASSi (m.), hermit.

TAPO, penance.

TAMO,

darkness.

TAYO

(num.), three;

n.

tisso,

to cross, to overcome.

TALAM, surface, level.

TASO (adj.), moving, moveable.

TIDDANAM,

TIMBARU

[mar).
(see Grana-

destroyer.

(m.). the tinduka-tree.

tiracchdnagato, a beast, an animal.

TIRIYAM

TU

(adv.), across.

(particle),

now, but.

TUNDlKiRO,

TUNHI

cotton-tree.

(adv.), silently.

TUVATAM (adv.),

(pron.),

you,

thou

(see

firm.

staff.

Grammar,

to give (see

p. 56).

DADDALLATI,

to blaze, to shine

brilliantly.

DADDU

(f.),

leprosy.

DANTO, a tooth.
DAMO, self-command.
dammo

(adj.), to

DAYA

(f.),

be tamed.

mercy, pity.
a cave.

DARl (f.),
DAVO, amusement.

DASA (num.), ten.

DASSANAM, insight, discernment.
DANAM, alms.
DANI (adv.), now.
DAYADO, kinsman.

di-jo, twice

state

TH.

{i.e.

DITTHA

born.

ditthapado, one

Grammar).

THADDHO

DAYO, a forest.
DARO, DARA, wife.
DASO, slave.

quickly.

TEJO (n.), splendour.

TELAM, rape-oil.

TVAM

(adj.),

DADATI,
[tint.

TALO, fan-palm.
TITTHATI, to stand
TINAM, grass.

right-handed;

rings.

DANDO,

f.

(adj.),

DAKKHINEYYO (adj.), worthy of

DALHO

(adv.), tliere.

TARATI,

DAKKHINO
southern.

tanho, Imviiig great desire.

who has

Nibbana).

(interjection).

proud jati-tthaddho, proud of his

DITTHI (f.), view, beUef.

DIBBO (adj.), celestial.

birth.

DIVASO,

(adj.), firm,

stubborn,

THANAYATI,

THAVARO
THERO,

THOLO

to thunder.

(adj.), stationary, firm.

a priest, an elder.
(adj.), big.

a day.

divasd (adv.), during the day.

diva ca ratio,

day and night.

DISA

a point of the compass.

(f.),
disaati (pass, of passati), to be seen.

DiGHO (adj.),
D.

DAKKHATA

(f.),

kUL

seen the

long.

DUKKHAM

(t.t.),

DUG-GATI,

hell,

pain.

bad

place.

un

GL088ART.

dutiyo, second

;
dutiyath (adv.), fur
second
time.
the

duvijano, difficult to understand.

DHiRO (adj.), wise.

DHUTTO, fraudulent.
DHUNATI, to shake.

DUSSAM, cloth.
DOBHATI, to illtreat.

dhurava, taking the yoke.

durato (adv.), from

DHORAYHO,

DORE (adv.),

DHURO,

far.

ayoke.
beast of burden.

far.

N.

deva-ko, god.

NA (neg.), not.
NAKHO, nail of the finger.
NAGARAM, a town.
NANGALAM, plough.
NACCAM, dancing.
NANDI (f.), joy.
NAMATI, to bow down.

devatd, a deva.

devaputto, a god.

DEVO, a god.
DESAYATI, deseti,
DESO, country.
DESSi,

hater.

DEHO,

body.

domanasaam,

to preach.

dejection, gloom.

DOSO (Skr. dvesha), anger, hatred.

DOSO (Skr. dosha), defect, blemish.
DVAYO, of two sorts, divers.
dvi-padako, having two

DVE

(adv.), in

(with the dative).

NARASA BHO,
NARO, man.
NALINi (f.),

feet.

(num.), two.

dvedha

NAM ASS ATI, to honour.

NAMO (indecl.), honour, reverence

NAVA

two parts.

a pond.

(num.), nine.

NAVANlTAM,
DH.

(t. t.),

NAVO (adj.), new.

NAHATAKO

wealth.

(t. t.),

law, condition

ditthadhammo, the

visible condi-

spiritual instruction

who

is

superhu-

condition.

NAGO,

NALIKERO,

DHAMMO

NANATTAM,

(adj.), religious

fem.

NANA

dhammi.

DHATU

(n.

and

f.),

substance;

DHARANAM,

in

bearing
dharayati (cans.), to bear
(f.)f

whom

complete

susunago,

coconut-tree.
diversity.
different

various,

(adv.),

away from.
ndna-pjtakdro, of various sorts.

principle.

DHITI

in

serpent.

dhamma-vicayo, religious research.

;

is

tendon, muscle.

a serpent

young

one

cleansed, pure.

NAHARU,

tion, the present world.

uttarimanuasa-dhavimo,

man

cream.

tiavamo, ninth.

DHAJAGGAM, flag.
DHANAM, property,

DHAMMO

men.

chief of

mind.
in

wisdom, energy.

mind.

NAMA

(adv.),

NAMAM,
ndmaso

by name

name

indeed.

namanpam (t. t.).

(adv.), with

name.

GLOSSARY.

NIKAYO,
NI

multitude

assembly,

sa^^an/Arayo,

only iu

(prep.,

assemblage of beings.
composition),

downwards.

NI and NIR

ni-vdsi (adj.), dwelling.

ni-vdseti, to dress.

ni-vesanam, house, abode.

ni-vutOy obstructed.

(prep., only in

com-

position), outward.

ni-sdmeti, to attend, listen to.

down.

ni-sidati, to sit

NISSAYO

ni-kubbati, to deceive.

nik-kanii (adj.), free from desire.

what has been over-

nik-kttjjito,

thrown.

(t. t.),

resource

nis-sdya (ger.), dependent upon.

nihtno (adj.), low,

nik-khamati, to devote.

NICO

ni-kkhepo,

down

putting

inter-

(adj.), low,

nt-yati, to

go

NIGAMO,

vile.

mean, base.

out.

NONA (adv.),

ment.

surely.

nekkhammam, giving up

a town.

ni-gdhako, an oppressor, enemy.

ne-katiko, fallacious.

NIGRODHO,
NICCO (adj.),

NETTAM,

banyan-tree.

(adj.),

eye.

P.

go

down.

(t.t.),

bonum

to be extinguished,

PAMSU

the

(t. t.),

summum

(n.), dust, dirt.

tranquillity (Nibbdna).
free

(t. t.),

from care, or

NIMITTAM,

(t. t.),

sign,

invitation.

mark;

(adj.),

subject

of thought.

PARK H IK AM

(t. t.),

a feast held

thicket.

pa-gumbo,

forth, to get ready.

NIYO

pa-cdro, attendant.

own.

to cook.

pacca-kdlo, present time.

hell.

nt-rt<i//}a/t (pass.), to cease, to perish.

PACCAITAM

NIRODHO

paccantko

NIVATO,

with

pa-gganhdti, to hold out, to bring

PACATI,

(t.t.),

possessed

wing.

nit/ydniko, leading to salvation.

(adj.),

diarrheea.

(f.),

on the eighth day of the month.

pa-kkhipati, to throw.

nibhdsi (adj.), shining.

NIMANTANAM

PAKKHANDIKA
PAKKHI

having attained Nibbana.

NIRAYO,

composi-

onward.

pa-kdsati, to be visible, to manifest.

of the Buddhists.

NIBBUTI,

(prep.), frequently in

tion, before,

out.

NIBBANAM

nibbuto

PA

prudent.

ni-patati, to fall

NIBBATI

the world.

perpetual.

ni-jigimsati, to covet.

to

cattdro

nis-saranarh, outcome, result.

nik-k/iamati, to go out.

ni-pako

nissaya,

cessation.

humility.

ni-vareti (cans.), to keep

[off.
off,

to

ward

(adv.), singly.

(adj.),

adverse, hostile,

opposite.

PACCAYO,

a requisite.

160

OLOSSART.

pacca-vekkhati, to look

pati-bujjhati, to awake.

at.

pacc-ud-a-vattati, to retreat.

pati-bhdti, to appear, to be evident.

pacceko, each one, single, several.

pati-rupo (adj.), suitable,

PACCHIMO

pati-lab/tati, to obtain, to receive.

last

pacchimd

l.indermost,

(adj.),

disd, the west.

pati-ldbho, obtaining

pa-jahati, to abandon.

PA J A

(f.),

fit.

attainment.

pati-vatteti, to subvert

with a, not

to be subverted.

progeny, race.

pa-jjalat't, to burn, to blaze.

pati-vijjhati, to acquire.

pa-janati, to know, to understand

pati-sankhdti, to reflect.

make known

pati-sahcikkhati, to consider.

caus. pahndpeti, to

pati-mm-vedi

p. p. p. panhatto.

pajdyati, to multiply.
pajjalati, to shine.
;

tela-

pajjoto, an oil-lamp.

pahcamo, the

PANNA,

PATHAVl

intellect,

under-

pantto

question.

and PATI, towards, back,

in return; in composition before

pati-kkamo, retreating.

pati-ggahanam, acceptance,

receiv-

ing (to ganhdti).

know,

for

PATATI,

to

fall

caus. patayatu

(f.),

fixity,

resting-

place.

to personate

PATTAM,

leaf.

pattakallam, seasonableness, time-

paccamasi.

liness.

forsaking.

way.
pati-pujeti, to honour.
pati-ppa-ssambhati, to be calmed,

pattactvaram, bowl and robe.

step,

come

term

wise man.

PA-TITTHA

pati-cchddeti, to conceal.

subside, to

nibbdna.

tude.

pati-cchddi, covering.

({.),

accomplished, excelneuter,

patisalldndrdmo, delighting in soli-

puti-cchddanarh, concealment.

patipadd

as

pati-sallanam, solitude.

ofi^.

anger.

(t. t.),

pati-rupo, suitable.

pati-ghdto, repulsion, warding

pati-nis-sago

lent

PANDU (adj,), yellow.

PANHO and PANHO, question.

pati-kkatnati, to step backwards.

aor.

earth.

(m.), aspiration (t.t).

(adj.),

PANDITO,

vowels, pace.

pati-jdndti, to

(f.),

pa-ni-dahati, to stretch.

PANIDHI

standing.

PATI-GHO,

aor. pace-

paccassosum.

pa-ndmati, to bend,

fifth,

PANHAM (panham),
PATI

assosi,

pati-sevati, to practise, to receive.

five.

wisdom,

assent

pati-sundti, to

lamp

pajjoto, light, lustre,

PANCA (num.),

(adj.), experiencing.

pati-sarano, refuge, help,

to

an end.

to

PATTI (f.), obtaining,

PATTO, bowl.

acquisition.

patto, p. p. p, of pdpundti.

GLOSSARY.

PATTHAYATI,

to

wish

for,

to

PARINAMO,

PA-DlPO, lamp.

PARITTA

evil.

further

now,

(adv.),

(the

same as puna).
to reject.

PANTHO,

a road

PAPPOTI,

see papunati.

pa-bba-jati, to

PA-BBAJITO

one

(f.) (t.t.),

who has
life.

Nibbana.

front, before.

pariy-dpundti, to learn thoroughly

pari-yosdnam, termination.
pari-rundhati, to surround

mountain..

to lay

siege.

parl-vatto, circle, succession

modi

fication.

splendour.
[ful.

p. p. p. to pamajjati, sloth(adj.),

crushing, destroy-

pari-vanneti, to describe, to praise.

pari-vdreti (cans.), to surround, to

accompany.

PARI-VESANA

ing.

(f.

and

n.),

dUtri-

PA-MANAM, measure.
PAMADO, carelessness.

PARISA,

pO'tnuhcati, to release.

pari-sujjhati (pass.), to be purified.

pa-mussati, to leave behind.

parisuddho

PAMOCANAM,

payirupa-sati, to honour.

PARISSAYAM, danger.
PARIHARO, attention.

pa-yutto, tied.

pareto, dead, destroyed.

PARAM

(adv.),

deliverance.

beyond, after.

parabhava, sufiering,

PARI

loss.

decay, loss.

(prep.), around, about, fre-

quently used in composition, where

it

bution of food.

PARO

assembly.

(adj.), pure, clear.

(adj.),

distant,

further

other.

paramo, highest.

PARABHAVO,

pariydputo.

pari-ydyo, succession, order, way.

the pabbajja

pa-majjati, to delay.

pa-maddt

to attain

pari-punno, completed.

p. p. p.

pabhamkaro, light-giving.

PABHASO,

(t. t.),

pariy-addti, to seize, lay hold of.

forth.

(t. t.),

n.), protection.

pari-mukham (adv.), in

ordination.

PABBATO,

PARIDEVO,

and

lamentation.

pari-bhasati, to revile.

given up the world.

PABBAJJA (f.), monastic

PABBAJJA

pari-pako, maturity, perfection.

also neuter.

lungs.

go

(f.

pari-nibbdti

pa-nudati, to remove,

PAPPHASAM,

change, alteration

digestion.

pa-duttho, wiclied,

pamatto,

apparatus.

pari-cito (p. p. p.), accumulated.

step; nibbana.

pa-dahati, to strive, to exert.

PANA

PARIKKHARO,

pari-kkhino, wasted.

desire.

PA DAM,

167

appears also as PALI.

PARO

(adv.),

PALASO,

beyond, more than.

leaf.

paligho, an obstacle.

PA-VACANAM,
Buddha.

the

word of the

GLOSSARY.

168

pa-vatteti

to

(caus.),

set

rolling;

PATIPADIKAM (t.t.), food offered

on the day following fuU-muon

dhammacakke, having
founded the kingdom of truth.
PAVANAM, side of a mountain.

PATANAM,

pa-vapati, to sow.

gabbhapatanam,

pavattite

pa-vassati, to rain.

day.

riage

pa-vuati, to enter.

PATi

palayati, to run away.

PATU

pali-gunthati, to

en-

to

envelop,

causing to

fall.

causing

miscar-

abortion.

a bowl.

(f.),

(adv.), manifestly.

patu-bhavati,

become

to

visible

aor. patur-ahosi.

tangle.

PALLANKO,
pa-sattho (p. p.

a couch.

patu-bhavo, appearance.

p.), praised.

[fied.

pada-talarh, sole of the foot.

pa-sanno, p. p. p. to pasidati, satis-

PADO,

pa-sahati, to use force.

pdddraho, worth a pdda.

pa-sado, brightness, clearness, glad-

PADO,

a small silver coin.

foot.

PANAM,

ness.

drinking.
bad.

pa-acuiati, to rule.

pdpako

PASU, cattle.
PASSATI, to see.

pdpiccho, having sinful desires.

PAPUNATI, PAPONOTI, PAPP-

calming down.
pa-ssambhati, to calm down ; p.

pa-ssaddhi

(adj.),

OTI,

(f.),

p. p.

PAPO

passaddho.

pa-ssambhayam, calming down.

to attain

pattabbo, attitin-

able.

bad.

(adj.), evil,

pa-ssasati, to exhale air.

PAYASO, rice-milk.
PARAM, the other shore.

PASSAVO,

pdrarh Gangdya, across the Ganges.

urine.

PAHANAM,

abandoning.

pdri-sajjo

(adj.),

belonging to an

brahmapdrisajjo, be-

pa-hitatto, resolute.

assembly

pahuto, much, abundant.

longing to the retinue of

pa-hoti, to be able.

brabma.

pa-honako

pakimo

(adj.), sufficient.

(adj.),

cooked,

PALAYATI,
pdliccam,

ripfned.

PANAKO, worm,
PANI (m.), hand.

Maha-

pdri-suddhi, purity, perfection.

dressed,

PACANAM, a goad.
PANAM, living being.
panatipati (adj.), taking
PANO, breath.

to guard, to preserve.

hoariness,

greyness

of

hair.

[season.
pd-vuasako, belonging to the rainy
life.

insect.

patikankho, to be expected.

PASANO,
PASADO,

a stone.
house of more than one

storey, tower, palace.

pdhuneyyo
guests.

(adj.),

worthy of being

GLOSSARY.

pitthi-mamsiko
pilakd

(adj.),

backbiting.

PINIJAPATO

(t.t.),

food received

alms bowl.

in the

PORO,

full.

PEKHA

a boil.

(f.),

109

desire

punnapekho,
good works.

(f.),

looking for

pecca

having departed.

(ger,),

PINDI (f.), lump, mass.

PINDO, lump, ball food alms.
PITA (m.), father (see Grammar).

peseti (caus.), to send.

POTAKO,

youth, cub.

PITTAM,

potikd

maiden.

bile.

PI PAS A,

(f.),

converted person

thirst.

PIPPHALI (f.), long pepper.

PIYO (adj.), dear.
PISUNO (adj.), backbiting.

ponobbhaviko,

PIHAKAM,

POSO, man.

PiTI,

PUNNO

spleen.

(adj.),

son.

and

PANA.

punab-bhavo, rebirth.
flower.

PHARATI, to flash, to shine

PHARUSO, harsh, unkind.

PHALAM,

fruit.

PHALATI,

to

split

PHANITAM,

PUBBO

phdleti (caus.), to

PURAM,

former, early.

pus, matter.

purato (adv.),

puratthhno

in front of.

(adj.), eastern.

PURA (adv.),

PHALO,

PHASU

town.

pura-kkharoti, to put in front.

formerly, previously.

split, to cleave.

(adj.),

comfortable.

phdsu-vihdro, comfort, ease.

PHUTO,

thrilled,

PHUSATI,
p. p. p.

to

pervaded.

touch,

to

reach;

phuttho.

PURISAKO,

PHOTTABBAM

(adj.), flowering, blos-

soming.
(t. t.),

touch.

a male.

B.

pujako, honouring.

POJA, attention, veneration.

POJETI, to honour.
PCTI,

to

ploughshare.

PHUSSITO

minister, attendant.

asunder,

sugar.

PURANO, former.
PURIMO. east.
PURISO, man,

forth.

break open.

pubbanho, forenoon.

PUBBO,

float;

PH.

[wide.

(adj.),

to

question.

good, virtuous.

(adv.), separately, far

PUPPHAM,

or piluvati,

old.

caus. pildpeti.

PUTTO,

see

PORANAKO,

and

PLAVATI,

PUTHU
PUNA,

sensual.

connected with re-

birth.

PORANO

joy, delight.

PUGGALO, individual.
PUCCHATI, to ask, to

a bird.

pothujjaniho, belonging to an un-

cold in the head.

PI-NASO,

POKKHARASAKATO,

stinking, foal.

BANDHATI,

to bind.

BANDHAXAM,
fetter.

binding;

bonds,

OL088ART.

170

BANDHU (m.),

BHAJATf,

kinsmnn.

BALI (in.), religious offering.

BALIVADDO, an ox.

BHANATI,
BHANATI,

BAHU(adj.), many.

many

bahu-ppado, having

BALHO

first

'

compound

BUDDHO,
'

constituents

(t. t.),

to say, to

tell.

t.,

fem.), a religious life

addressing

the duties

BHARO,

by-anti-karoti,

to

re-

move.

being,

existence

BHAVO, corporeal existence, birth.

BHAGO, portion, part, share.
BHATARO, brother.

BRAHMANO,

to

good.

realm.

BHATA (m.),
abolish,

(adj.),

to be, to exist.

a brahmin.

bhdveti

brother.

burden.

(cans,

to bhavati),

to

in-

crease, to cause to exist.

BY AS AN AM,

misfortune, unhap>

piness.

(f.),

BHISMO (adj.), terrible.

BHiYO, BHIYYO (adj.),
BHiRU (adj.), timid.

anger.

BH.

BHAKKHO (adj.), eating.

BHAOANDALA
fistula.
BH AGAVA (adj.), worshipful,
(f.),

venerable

an

epithet

of

the

BHUJISSO,

(f.),

sister.

BHANGAJVI, hempen

a free

more.

man; a

freed

slave.

BHUNJATI,
bhummo

to enjoy

to eat.

(adj.), terrestrial.

BHUSAM

Buddha.

a Buddhist

of

BHIKH;^N! (f), female mendicant.

wish to injure.

BYAROSANA

title

monk.

(m.), illness.

BYAPADO,

BHAVO, property.
BHASATI, to tell.

BHIKKHU,

byd-karoti, to answer.

BHAGINl

for

to bear, to support.

life.

BYADHI

term

BH AVAIVT, lord, sir (see Grammar).

BHAVANAM,

BRAHMAM, practice of devotion.

also
BRAHMACARIYAM (t.
of a religious

t), ticket food.

BHADDO, BHADRO
BHAYAM, fear.

BHAVATI,
wisdom.

(f.),

(t.

BHARATI,

the Enlightened.'

BRAVlTI, BROTI,

(t.t.),

a Buddhist monk.

of wisdom.

BODHI

speak; pass, bha-

food; uddeta

BHADANTO,

seed.

an epithet of Gotama,
a designation of

BOJJHANGO

to

BHATTAM,
aaldka

and used as

Gotama

to shine.

food given on special occasions

very.'

BALO (adj.), young, foolish.

BAHIRO (adj.), external.
BiJAM, grm,

honour; to

nnati.

feet.

hard, severe, as

(adj.),

part of a

to serve, to

cultivate.

(adv.),

much, exceed-

ingly.

cloth.

bhutakalo, time to speak the truth.

GLOSSARY.
bhutapubbo

that

(adj.),

ben

has

before.
spirit,

BHCMI(f.),

the earth.

mamayito, concerning oneself ; own.

MAYURO, MORO, peacock.

MARANAM, dying, death.

(adj.), frightful.

BHESAJJAM,

medicine.

master

sir,

BHOGO,
having

being.

parting.

BHERAVO
BHO,

MANTETI, to consult, to advise.

MANTO, hymn the Vedns.
MANDIVO, slowness, stupidity.
;

BH CTO,
BHEDO,

little

mahab-balo, having great strength.

Grammar).

(see

wealth

appa-bhogo,

MAHA,

food.

MA,

a gnat, mosquito.

MAKKHI

(adj.),

concealing

pa-

path.

MANKU,

troubled, restless.

MANGALO (adj.), happy.

MACCU (m.), death.

MANO,

pride, arrogance.
illusion, deceit;

(f.),

MARISO,

middle.

venerable person

term

of address.

MALA

MAXDANAM, adornment.
MANDALI (adj.), having a disc.
MATTA (f.), measure quality.
MATTHAKAM, head.
MATTHALUNGAM, brain.
;

MICCHA

wrongly.

wrong conduct.

miccha-caro,

MITTO,

deer.

(adv.), falsely,

friend.

sleep

vigatamiddho,

awake.

honey.

pleasing,

a garland.

(f.),

MASO, month.
MIGO, antelope,

MIDDHAM,

enjoyment.

MINATI,

madfiumeho, diabetes.
pleasant,

charming.

to

MUKHAM,

p.

f.

p.

mouth, face; means,

MURHO,

face.

tnanoramo

MUCCHA

(f.),

(adj.), pleasant, delight*

measure

tnetabbo.

MANUSSO, man, human being.

MANO, mind (also neuter).
ful.

mayavi,

deceitful.

MAJJHO, middle.
MANNATI, to think.

MANAPO,

(adj.),

(f.)

human.

MAYA

strong drink.

MADHU(n.),

a
(adj.), young;
young man.
MATA (f.), mother (see Grammar).

MANASO, lust.
MANUSO, MANUSi

hypocritical.

MAGGO,

MADO,

wind.

MANAVAKO

MAKASO,

(adj.),

g^at

negation.

MALUTO,

MAMS AM, flesh.

MAJJAM,

Grammar).

maha-raja, king, great king.

M.

pamakkhi,

great (see

mahd-matto, king's minister,

noble.

property.

BHOJANAM,

majjhimo

171

cause.

MUNCATI,

faintnesB.

to release.

GLOSSARY.

172

MUNDAKO,

term

shaveling,

of

yasassl (adj.), famous.

YACATI,

reproach.

MUTTAM,

urine

putimuttam,

to ask, to beg, to entreat.

to go.

YATRA

urine of cattle.

livelihood.

(f.),

YANAM,

release.

MUTTr(f.),

YATI,

preceding

going,

MUDU (adj.), soft.

MUDDHA (m.), head.
MUDHA (adv.), gratis, for nothing.

ydni-fcato, used as a vehicle.

MUSA (adv.),

YAPANATI,

wrongly.
musa-vddo, lying, falsehood.

MUHUTTO,

second, hrief

MOLHO, stupid.
MCLAM, root.
a

to

MERAYAM,

pair

intoxicating liquor.

YOTTAM, tie.
YONI (f.), womb

t.

source, origin.

really.

YOBBANAM,

youth.

R.

a superhuman being, a

RAKKHATI,

to restrain

RAKKHA

p. p. p. yato.

YATO (adv.), since.

YATTHA (adv.),

the

same

as

inasmuch.

YATHA (adv.),

as.

the reality.

YADA (adv.),

to protect.

(f.),

protection.

RAJATAM, silver.
RAJJAM, kingdom.
RATTI (f.), night.
ratti-n-divo,

yathabhutam (adv.), according to

men.

t.

the liver.

yaksha.

RABHASO

day and night.

contemptuous,

(adj.),

fierce.

when, whenever.

fame, renown.

ycusassivd,

great numbers.

Y.

YAKKHO,

in

Nibbana.

ignorance.

YAKANAJfr,

generation.

YUGO (also neuter), yoke.

[to.
Y UN J ATI, to turn one's attention
YEBHUYYO (adj.), abundant

YONISO,

YASO,

ki-

in con-

YO (pron.), who (see Grammar).

YOGAKKHEMO, security

MODATI, to rejoice.
MORO, see MAYURO.

yatra,''

ydva

as.

yebhuyyena,

ME DO, fat, blubber.

as long

(adv.),

Y'UGAM,

fly.

sexual intercourse.

YATI,

to live.

vanca, and as long as

long

MEG HO, cloud, storm, rain.

METHUNO (adj.), relating

MOHO,

maintenance.

junction with eva, ydvad eva, so

of time.

MCSTKO,

YAPANAM,

YAVA

measure

car-

riage, car.

surrounded

RAMATI,
light in

by eminent

RASO,
taste.

to enjoy oneself, to derato, delighting.

sap, juice

sweet thing

GLOSSART.
rtusako

178

(adj.), short.

RASSO (adj.), short.

RAHADO, a deep pool, a lake.
RAHO, solitude.
RAGO, evil desire, greed, attach-

V.

VAKKAM,

kidney.

vaggiyo (adj.), belonging

VAGGU

to

a group.

(adj.), beautiful.

rajabhato, king's soldier.

VACCO, lustre.
VAJATI, to walk.
VAJIRO, Indra's thunderbolt.

RAJA (m.), king, see Grammar.

RAMO, joy, delight.
RITTO [rishta], injured.

VANCANIKO, deceitful.
VANCETI (caus.), to deceive.
VADDHATI, to grow, to increase;

ment,

lust.

rajadhant, royal city.

RUDDO (adj.),
RUKKHO,

ROPAM

(t. t.),

(adj.),

pour out.

VANNO, appearance, beauty, form

caste

form, figure.

ROGO, illness.
ROCETI (caus.),

ROSAKO

to

cruel.

tree.

vannava

(inter).),

VATTATI,

wTathful.

take

to

p. p. p.

laddho.

LAYO,

instant (brief measure of

LASIKA

(f.),

the fluid which lubri-

cates the joints.

LABHA

(adv.

vantage

LOKO,

VATTHU
VATTHU

indeed

verily

to take place.

cloth

(n.),

raiment.

substance.

(m.), a site, a building

(Skr. vdstu).

time).

LUDDO

having

beauty.

VATA

to approve.

VATTHAM,
LABHATI,

(adj.),

dat.),

for the ad-

V AD ATI,

to declare

to speak.

VANAM, wood, forest.

VANATHO, desire, lust.
VANIBBAKO, mendicant.
VANDAKO, praising.
VANDATI, to praise.
VAPATI, to sow.
VAPPO, sowing.

of.

(adj.), cruel.

world.

loka-jettho, chief of the world.

varanhu, knowing what

LOKA-DHAMMO

varado, giving what

(t. t.),

things of

VARO

knowing the world

thet of the Buddha).

LOMAM,

hair of the body.

LOMAHAIMSO, horripilation.
LOHITAM, blood.

LOHITO

(adj.), red.

(epi-

VALl

is

excellent.

excellent.

varaharo, bringing what

the world, worldly condition.

loka-dhatu, world-system.
loka-vidu,

is

is

excellent.

(adj.), excellent
(f.),

a wrinkle.

valittaro (adj.), ^Tinkled.

VASATI,

to dwell.

vatalako, wretched, outcast.

VASA
flesh.

(f.),

serum

marrow of the

GLOSSARY.

174

VASALO,
VASSO,

VA (conj.),
VACA (f.),
VATO,

VI-TAKKO,

outcast.

rain

pa

either

tfd,

reflection,

thought.

VITACCHIKA (f.), scabies.

VITTAM, property, wealth.

a year.

or.

word, saying, speech.

vitthdrati,

wind.

to declare, to amplify

aor. vitthasi.

[cation.

VADITAM, music.
VADO, speaking, speech.
VAYAMATI, to struggle, to strive.

vitthdro, detail, extension, amplifi-

VAyAMO

VINA

exertion, endea-

(t. t.),

dwelling, living, abode.

training.

(adv.), without.

vineti, to

VAHANAM,

carrying; a vehicle;
an animal used in riding.

VI

knowing, wise.

(adj.),

vi-ndseti, to waste.

vour.

VASO,

VI DO

VI-NAYO,

used

(prep.),

in

composition,

wrong

VIGGAHO,

manussa,

human

being.
[parsing.
vi-kirano (adj.), squandering, disvi-kkandati, to cry out.

vi-ppa-mutto

change, reverse.

(p. p. p.), released.

vi-ppa-yogo, absence.
vippa-vasati, to

go abroad

p. p. p.

vippavuttho.

vi-gahati, to obtain.

vi-cakkhano,

to acquire.

VI-PARI-NAMO,

time.

body

vinodeti (cans.), to dispel.

VINDATI,

vi-pdceti, to be indignant.

asunder, apart from.

vi-kalo,

remove, to put away.

vinodanam, removal, dispelling.

vippavdso,
wise,

knowing',

dis-

absence

ticivarenca

avippavdso, not parting with the

three robes.

cerning.
vi-carati, to

wander.

vi-ppa-sldati, to

become calm.

vi-cdro, investigation.

vi'bhajati, to divide, to distinguish.

VICIKICCHITAM, doubt.
VICCHIKO, scorpion.

VIBHAVO, power,
VI-BHAVO (t. t.),

vi-jand-vato (adj.), understanding.

vi-jeti, vi-jinuti, to

know

VIJJATI,

to

to be, to exist.

VIJJA
VIJJU

(see

Grammar).

(f.),

knowledge, wisdom.

(f.),

lightning.

speak

VINNO

to, to

in-

vijdndti),

address, to inform.

(adj.), intelligent.

p. p. p.

to

release.

VI-MOKHO, release.
VI-MOCAVAM, releasing.
vi-rajo, free

to

release

to

VI.MUTTI(f.),

consciousness,

(cans,

adornment.

vimutto.

telligence.

vihndpeti

vibhusanaiii,

vi-muncati,

vijjuko (adj.), lightning.

VIIK^NANAM,

absence of ex-

istence, formless existence.

vibhdvayatl, to understand.

conquer.

VIJJATI,

prosperity.

free

from corruption, pure

from dust.

vi-rajjdti, to

viratto.

be displeased

p. p. p.

GLOSSARY.

VIRATI

(f.),

176

VEDAGO (t. t.), knowing the law.

VEDANA (f.) (t.
perception,

abstinence.

vi-ramati, to abstnin.

t.),

sensation.

vi-ravati, to cry aloud.

vi-rago, absence of desire.

VEPULLAM,

vira>eti (cans.), to

veyyd-karanam, explanation.

put away.

VIRIYAM,

exertion, strength.

vi-ruhati, to

go on.

vi-rocati, to

lie

VEYYABADHIKO,

toilet

p. p. p. vivato.

vi-varati, to

open

separation,

seclusion

VELO,
VESi

VISAM,

VEHASO, sky.
VOROPETI (cans.),

uneven.

(with

time.

viviccati (pass.), to separate oneself.

poison.

to

[al>l.).

VEVANNIYAM, change,

discrimination.

(adj.),

ill;

VERAMANi (f.), abstinence

VEROCANAKO, bright.
VELA (f.), time, occasion.

perfume.

VI-VEKO,

vi-samo

sick,

byabddho.

brilliant.

VILEPANAM,

development.

(f.),

diversity.

harlot.

to deprive of.

vi-auddho, (adj.), pure.

S.

VISOKAM, show, spectacle.

VISOCIKA (f.), cholera.
VISESO,

SA, as
'

distinction.

Buddhist temple.

(f.),

hurting.

mta-malo, spotless.
VITO (adj.), devoid of;

a-vito,

free from.

vi-ti-sareti, to

remind mutually.

(num.), twenty.

VUTTHI
VUTTI

(f.),

(f.),

rain.

conduct.

vutiiavd, dwelling, residing.

vun-ma

(adj.), dwelling.

vupakattho, distant, removed.

VOPASAMO,

VE

paciBcation.

(interj.), indeed.

VEiyU

bond, at-

attentively.

not

(t. t.),

con-

ceit.

SAK-KAYO, own body or

SAK-KARO, hospitality.

person.

aak-karoti, to receive hospitality, to

honour.

hero.

ViSATI

compound

samhanti, to strike.

SAK-KAYA-DITTHI

vitipatati, to transgress.

ViRO,

(t. t.),

SAKO (adj.), own.

SAKKACCA (adv.),

vi-himsati, to hurt.

VI HI MSA

of a

tachment.

viharati, to dwell.

VI-HARO, living;

member

SAMYOJANAlff

renowned.

vi-ssuto (adj.),

first

with.'

(m.), a

bamboo, a reed.

SAKKO

(adj.), able.

SAKKHf,

SAKHA
(see

witness.
(m.),

companion, friend

Grammar).

SAGGO,

heaven.

8ANKAPP0

(t.t.),

thought, Imagi-

nation, aspiration.

tan-kampati, to quake, to tremble.

san-kuddho, ang^y.

GLOSSARY.

176

SAN-KHARO

the elements,

(t. t.),

matter.

SADDHIM (adv.), with.

SANTA M (a term for Nibbana).

san-khipati, to shorten, to abridge.

aan-khittena, concisely,

SAN-GAHO,

l)riefly.

aan-tatto, scorched.

protecting.

SAN-GAM O, conflict, battle.

SAN-GHATi (t.t.), one of the three
robes of a priest.

SANG HO,

the

SADDO, sound.
SADDHA, faith.

Buddliist

clerical

tan-tarati, to be in haste.

SANTIKE (adv.), in the presence of.

SANTUTTHi (f.), contentment.
SANTUSSAKO, contented.
SANTO,

community.

SACE (conj.), if.

SACCAM, truth.

san-ditthiko (adj.), visible.

see

tacchikaroti, to

true, good.

san-dasseti (cans.), to show, to teach.

face

to

face

p. p. p. sacchikato.

SACCHIKIRIYA

(f.),

aan-dhupdyati, to smoke.
8an-nayhati, to bind, to fasten.

realization.

san-ni-patati, to assemble.

sahcicca (adv. ger.), intentionally.

8annipatiko{a,A].), gathered together.

SANJATI

SAPADANAM

samamo,

birth.

(f.),

8ap

refraining.

pinddya

SANNA (t. t.) (f.), perception.

SATHO (adj.), wicked, crafty.

SAPPI, cow's

SATTHI

sap-puriso,

(adv.), constantly

carati,

goes

begging-rounds constantly.

(num.), sixty.

butter.

good man.

SANHO (adj.), soft smooth, gentle.

SATAM (num.), a hundred.

sabbattha (adv.), everywhere.

SATI

sabba-dhi, from all sides.

(f.),

thoughtfuluess,

remem-

memory;

p. p. p.

garati,

recollecting,

seventy.

tattavdso, abode of beings.

SATTO,

an assembly.
wretched
samana.
samanako,
(f.),

teacher.

tad-attho, one's

own advantage.

aaddahdno.

SAMAYO,

to believe;

ment ;

time, assembly, agree-

ekatii

samayam, once upon

a time.

always.

SAD-DAHATI,

side.

aamanndgato, endowed with.

weapon.

SATTHA (m.),
SADA (adv.),

ascetic.

from every

being.

SATTHAM,

an

SAM ATTO (adj.), complete.

SAMATHO, tranquillity.
SAMANTO, all, entire aamantd,

(num.), seven.

SATTATI,

Grammar).

SAMANO,

mindful.

SAITA

(see

(pron. adj.), every one, all

SABHA

thoughtful, reflecting.
Sato,

sabbattho, in every respect.

SABBO

brance.

aatima (adj.) of retentive

his

p.p.

aama-vekkhati, to take into consideration.

GLOSSARY.
sam-a-gacchati, to assemble.

instig'ate, to advise.

sam-passati, to behold, to discern.

sam-pa-hamseti

sam-a-dahati, to put together

become

pass.

tran-

(cnus.), to gladden,

to delight, to praise.

sampha-ppa-lapo, frivolous talk.

sam-phassa-jo, urising from contact.

quilized.

SAMADHI
SAMANO

(adj.),

same,
[ment.

sam-bahulo

(t.t.),

attain-

sam-bddAo, pressure,

tam-ikkliati, to consider, to reflect.

straits.

(adj.),

SAM-BHAVO,

sain-ug-ghato, removal.

sam-mannati, to agree

sam-ut'tejeti (caus.), to

SAM-UD-AYO,
sam

stir, to excite.

samudito, ele-

vated.

production.
to, to

decide

to sanction.

SAMMA (indecl.), fully, thoroughly

Sammd sambuddho,

the All Wise.

aam-mukht-bhuto, confronted.

SAMUDDO,

sam-mukho

sea.

sam-upabbulho

equal.

cannot be shaken.

smoke

to

sam-panno

endowed with.

SAM-PA- YOGO,

in

union, presence.

future state, next

tam-pa-vedhati, to tremble.

to lie

down.

SA YANAM (SENAM), lying, sleeping

bed, couch.

SARANAM,

SARABO

future.

world.

night.

sam-viggo, excited.

SAYATI,

(adj.), relating to the

SAM-PARAYO,

(f.),

sam-vaso, living with.

sam-pa-dhupayati,
volumes.

tam-parayiko

sani'modati, to agree with ; taddhiih

8, to exchange friendly greetings.

endowed with.

(p. p. p.),

choice,

sam-muyhatit to be stupefied ; p.p. p.

sammulho.

SAMVARI

sam-paj'ano, conscious.
(p. p. p.),

consent,

(f.),

determination.

sam-pa-kampati, to tremble, to
sbake ; a-sam-pa-kampiyo, that

sam-patto

(adj.), face to face.

SAM-MUTI

(p. p. p.), set up.

sam-uhanti, to remove.

SAMO,

con-

(used frequently in composition)

rise, origin.

ud-eti, to arise

t),

seeking rebirth.

sam-uk-kajjisati, to exalt.

sam-ut-thanam, rising, originating.

(t.

stitucnt of bodhi.

sambhav-esi

assembly.

(f.),

many.

(adj.),

SAM-BOJJHAJNfGO

tam-d-hito, steadfast.

contact.

(t.t.),

sam-phasso, contact.

equal,

similar.
(f.)

SAM-PHASSANAM

meditation.

(f.) (t.t.),

SAM-A-PATTI

SAM-ITI

tranqiiilization.

sam-a-dapeti (caus. samadiyati), to

to

serene

tam-pa-gadanath, making

tam-a-carati, to follow.

samadhlyati,

177

refuge.

(f.),

lizard.

sar'ito (p. p. p.),

flowing.

SARiRAM,
SARO,

body.

sound.
12

GL08RARY.

178

SALAKA,

a peg

tal-lahuko

(i><lJ-)> l>g)>t.

SALLiNO,

slip, bit

of wood.

bent together.

8IPPAM, skill.
SIRIMSAPO, a
tiri-tna (adj.),

SAVANAM, hearing.
SASSU (f.), mother-in-law.

SFRl

SAHA

SI LA

(in composition),

glory.

together,

thousand

(in

composi-

witli.

aaha-silt (adj.),
being fond of society.

SAKACCHA (f.), conversation.

SADHU (adv.), well, good.
SANAM, hempen
SAMICI

SAYATI,

SILI

Si HO,

having a

head.

(in composition), well,

good.

a parrot.

SUKHO (adj.),

(m.), rice.

habit, dispo-

lion.

SUKO,

proper.

of

niddd-tP, drowsy, slothful.

SiSAM,
should

SU

(adj.), 6t,

(adj.),

sition

SUKHO,

blest,

happy.

bliss.

SU-GATO, happy

taveti. {ctius. to sunoti), to impart,

(epithet of the

Buddha).
su-gandho, of good smell.

to inform.

SASANAM,

order,

the

command.

teaching

of

the

Buddha.

(adj.),

8UCI

purity.

(f.),

grasped.

SUNNAGARAI^r,

SIKKHATI,

SIKHA

peak, summit; aggi-

(f.),

su-ggahito

8u-cinno, well done.

astlimn.
to learn.

flame of

fire.

SINGHANIKA,

place

SUNOTI, SUNATI,

to hear (see

Grammar).

moral training.

8uto (p. p. p.), heard, renowned.

gudath (part.),

mucus of the

solitude,

void of houses.

SIKKH APADA.\I (t. t.), sentence of

SITO

piety.

(t.t.), aflfection

evening.

charioteer.

rites.

good

SALIKA (f.), the maynah-bird.

SAVAKO, a disciple.

sikfia,

cool.

nature, character

(t, t.),

sila-va (adj.), virtuous.

be remembered.

Buddhas,

SiLAM

SiLABBATAM

cloth.

aarantyo (adj.), that which

sa-ruppo

boundary, limit.

moral character,

to taste.

SARATHI,

(f.).

correctness.

(f.),

SAYANHO,

STMA

SiTAM, coldness.
SiTO (adj.), col<l,

tion).

SAHA (adv.),

stanza, a qloka.

SI VO (adj.), auspicious, blest, happy.

safiasa (adv.), with violence.

SASO,

a rock.

(f.),

SIVIKA(f.), a palanquin.

saha-gato, accompanied.

SALI

fortune, prosperity.

(f.),

SITjOKO, a

with.

SAHASSl,

snake.

having magnificence,

nose.

(Skr. gritd), resting upon.

sma

+ idam.

tu-dul-lahho, very difficult to obtain.

8U-DHAMMAT0 (t.t), perfection.

GLOSSARY.

8UDDH0

179

SOTAJ*,

(adj.), clean.

ear.

[tlon.

su-pati-panno, well-conducted.

SOTAPATTI

SUPATI,

SOTTHANAM,

to sleep.

SUPINAM,

sleep.

su-ppa-yutto (p. p.

[joined.

thoroughly

p.),

SURA

H.

the sun.

HA (interj.),

known.

HATTHI

a boy.

SUSSOSA (f.), desire to hear.

SCJU (adj.), conscientious.

HATTHO (p. p. p.),

is

under

training.

SEDO,

SENA

(adj.), best,

foremost.

[sleeping

and

sit-

to serve, to follow.

SEVANA

(f.),

to

HAVE

(adj.), lying, sleeping.

SEVATI,

SO
SO

addicted

to,

own

HI

devotion

A-sevana, not addicted

(pron.), this (see

(adj.),

to carry

away.

HARI (adj.), green.

HARITAM, grass.
haritattam, greenness, yellowness.

ting] dwelling.

seyyako

onl
surrounded

by walls.

army.

SEN-ASANAM,

heart.

HANTI, to kill.
HAND A (interj.), come
HAM MI YAM, house

HARATI,

sweat, moisture.
(f.),

bristling.

hand.

H ADA YAM,

SEMHAM, phlegm.
SEKHO (t. t.), one who

SETTHO

truly.

(m.), elephant.

HATTHO,

rheumatism.

SOLO,

pleasant speech.

intoxicating liquor.

su-vi-jdno, easily

SUSU,

tenderness.

(f.),

8v-akkhdto, well told.

(adj.), well-built.

(f.),

SURIYO,

blessing.

SOSO, consumption.

satisfied.

su-mapito

sanctifica-

to shine.

SORACCAM,
sovacassatd

su-bhavo, easily supported.

su-mano,

SOBHATI,

(f.), (t. t.),

indeed

certainly,

gold.

HIRi, modesty, shame.

HITO

oneself.

to hurt.

HIRANNAM,
by

because

also.

HIMSATI,

to.

Grammar).
sarh (adv.)

(interj.), truly.

(part.), for,

(p. p. p.

and

adj.), beneficial.

SOKO, sorrow, grief.

SOCATI, to grieve.

hino (p. p.

socanatfam, mourning.

HETTHIMO (adj.), lower, lowest.

HETU (adv.), on account of, by

SOCANAM,

SONDO
fem.

HETHETI,

mourning.

(adj.),

SOXpI.

addicted to drink

p.),

means

HOT!,

wasted, decayed.

to injure.

of.

to be

see bhavati.

HERTFORD
FRINTZD BY eTIFHEN

ATIBTIS

AND SONS.

SINHALESE ALPHABET.
Vowels

^a

^
Vowel Symbols.
a.

Z^^ha

ka.

u.

(^y

^.

0.
t^

if

(^

(^ u Se

J. ^.

J.

o.

0.

(B^

fc fi SJ^Jku. ty\Jkn6^ke. 6t3nko.

)ki

^khu.

^ khu.

Nasal Vowels.

The symhol
for any nasal

is

<?

ant.
<Y>6
It is also used
anc^her Consonant

hefore

Consonants.

^ ka.
O

'o)

kha

00

ga.

t50 gha

D ^a

ca

d^cka

^j^

f^jha

ta

(^ tha

d du

tb d^a

S^ 'na

tX) du

(3 tha

C^ da

Zd dha

^^

60 ya

e3 pha
6 ra

t^ sa

60 %a

pa

&S

Va

/^

f^

la*

-^t~)

Vha

Q5^

Tia

ma

'i'^

la.

Consonant Symbols

r.

Tlrama

hra

'

k.

nv.

Compound Consonants.

^a

(XS'^ja

tD cca

U)

QCs

'nj^aW^

(to

ddha

^U)

Tikha.

nda

c^

'bha

e^^ jjha

r^

tlha

(Lb tlha
'nilMZ.

S^

'ndha
un

Burmese Alphabet.
Vowels.

__

SYMBOLS.}

lb

L)

CJOka,. COokcij c8ki.

cSH. coku. en

ku. crcoke.cxrDokc.

GO

O/ ga

The

Nns/iL Vowels.

am

5^

11

another

is

syrnhil for the nasal votv-ds is

also vised

tb

express

any nasal

htforc

consonant.

Simple Consonants.
CIO

ka

O kha

O ga

IX)

O.S)

ca

DO cha

qj

ta

OO ^ha

U pa

(J

(JO

ya
OO Sa

ja

O.OJ

jha

dha

<ia

OO hha

-pha

ra

gha

^ dha

tha

OO ta

CO

la

na
OD na
C

COO 7ia
t>

V-a

Consonant Symbols.
C iia.
OCT nka

ya,

ij-a
-V-a

OO

ha

O^
(m

GO

ft^a

on

nha

Virdma

yya
kra /3

^ Uhya
^ra

O
ob^t.

rtiha

Compound Consonants.

(^

ryda

eg

O)

ppa

?i/ia

g ddka

^/^^ta

OOO Ssa.

ddha

OO OQ s^n a

-na

Q ma

OO ha

OJ

stn

go.

XAMBODIAN ALPHABET.
Vowels.

%^a.

%^cL.

/Ti.

i.

Q^vb.

i^

Vowel Symbols.

o
PTka.

QjjM

0\e.

o.
\

^Q^

0,^

<i>

e^ka ^ki ^ki. eTku.?^ku.C^ke.C^h

Nasal Vowels. The symhol ^ is added to the simple

irow-el:
It is also used as a nasal hefcrt
%^ arn
.

another consonant

Simple Consonants

f? ga

Xl^ gka

ja

flSJ jha

TQ ^a

Iha

^
n

da

(T^ dha

ti^

na

thu

da

t(S

dha

Tva

W pha

G^

Int

ka

kha

i3 ca

^ cha

i^

ta

ta

tS pa

ra

i^X^tfcL

U^ha

sa

'^ Vha

SkS la

"^

-iia

%^ ma

v-a

la

Compound Consonants
fSymtcl for

)0

rcL
j

gemintdtcn

**P

klika

(AO nda

iz^^ ncfka

f^

ttha

JV nna

l^ra

\^^ ndra

^Vssa SS^ ppa

^ ccka C^ nca ^)0 ttka

O
^^ ddha ^ dvu
ti^a

%^ mVa.

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
t

~2

CO

LIBRARif

o
o

o
tf>

At

o
t
14

Acme
-J

Under

Library Card
Pat.

Pocket

" Rrf. Index File."

Made by LIBRARY

BUREAU